XtraedgeFebruary 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 FEBRUARY 2012
Dear Students,

All of us live and work within fixed patterns. These patterns and habits
determine the quality of our life and the choices we make in life. There
are a few vital things to know about ourselves. We should become
aware of how much we influence others, how productive we are and
what can help us to achieve our goals. It is important to create an
environment which will promote our success. We should consciously
create a system that would enable us to achieve our goals. Most of us
live in systems which have come our way by an accident, circumstances
or people we have met over a period of time. We are surrounded by our
colleagues or subordinates who happened to be there by the fact of
sheer recruitment earlier or later by the management. Our daily routines
and schedules have been formed on the basis of convenience,
coincidence, and the expectations of society and sometimes due to
superstitions. The trick for success is to have an environment that helps
in attaining our goals. Control your life. Make an effort to launch your
day with a great start. A law of physics says that an object set in motion
tends to remain in motion. It is the same thing with daily routine. To
have a good start each morning will keep you upbeat during the day. If
you begin the day stressed, you will tend to remain so that way. The
best is to create a course of action or conditions where you are not
hassled for being late for a meeting, worried about household affairs or
distracted by happenings in the world.
Aim to be highly successful. Control the direction of your life. Not only
should you start the day on a cheerful note but also continue to do so
during the day. Keep yourself stimulated and invigorated during the
entire day. Start your day with a purpose. Have a daily direction and
trajectory of action. It will keep you on your course all day long.
Throughout the day reinforce your positive values and your choices.
Anything that helps you in maintaining your highest values and your
most important priorities should be welcome. Be in control of your life
and work. Create and sustain a wonderful environment filled with
beauty, peace, inspiration and hope.
Plan your day in such a way that suits your plans objectives and makes
you feel just right with the right amount of encouragement during the
entire day. You should give a direction to your day and timing.
Presenting forever positive ideas to your success.

Yours truly

Pramod Maheshwari,
B.Tech., IIT Delhi

Every effort has been made to avoid errors or
omission in this publication. Inr spite of this,
errors are possible. Any mistake, error or
discrepancy noted may be brought to our
notice which shall be taken care of in the
forthcoming edition, hence any suggestion is
welcome. It is notified that neither the
publisher nor the author or seller will be
responsible for any damage or loss of action to
any one, of any kind, in any manner, there from.
No Portion of the magazine can be
published/ reproduced without the
written permission of the publisher
All disputes are subject to the
exclusive jurisdiction of the Kota
Courts only.
Owned & Published by Pramod
Maheshwari, 112, Shakti Nagar,
Dadabari, Kota & Printed by Naval
Maheshwari, Published & Printed at 112,
Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota.

Editor : Pramod Maheshwari

Worry is a misuse of imagination.
Volume - 7 Issue - 8
February, 2012 (Monthly Magazine)
Editorial / Mailing Office :
112-B, Shakti Nagar, Kota (Raj.)
Tel. : 0744-2500492, 2500692, 3040000
e-mail : xtraedge@gmail.com
Editor :
Pramod Maheshwari
[B.Tech. IIT-Delhi]
Cover Design
Govind Saini

Layout
Rajaram Gocher
Circulation & Advertisement
Praveen Chandna
Ph 0744-3040000, 9672977502
Subscription
Himanshu Shukla Ph. 0744-3040000
Strictly reserved with the publishers
Editorial
Unit Price ` 20/-
Special Subscription Rates
6 issues : ` 100 /- [One issue free ]
12 issues : ` 200 /- [Two issues free]
24 issues : ` 400 /- [Four issues free]

Volume-7 Issue-8
February, 2012 (Monthly Magazine)

NEXT MONTHS ATTRACTIONS

Much more IIT-JEE News.
Know IIT-JEE With 15 Best Questions of IIT-JEE
Challenging Problems in Physics,, Chemistry & Maths
Key Concepts & Problem Solving strategy for IIT-JEE.
IIT-JEE Mock Test Paper with Solution
AIEEE & BIT-SAT Mock Test Paper with Solution

S

Success Tips for the Months
If one asks for success and prepares for
failure, he will get the situation he has
prepared for.
Loser's visualize the penalties of failure.
Winner's visualize the rewards of success.
Treat others as if they were what they
ought to be and you help them to become
what they are capable of being.
You never achieve real success unless you
like what you are doing
The first step toward success is taken when
you refuse to be a captive of the
environment in which you first find
yourself.
Believe in yourself ! Have faith in your
abilities ! without a humble but reasonable
confidence in your own powers you can not
be successful or happy.

CONTENTS
INDEX PAGE

NEWS ARTICLE 3
25% increase in number of girls from Bombay
zone for IIT-JEE
IIT placements : Companies Back on hiring
track

IITian ON THE PATH OF SUCCESS 5
Dr. Amitabha Ghosh
KNOW IIT-JEE 6
Previous IIT-JEE Question

XTRAEDGE TEST SERIES 47
Class XII IIT-JEE 2012 Paper
Class XI IIT-JEE 2013 Paper
Mock Test-3 (CBSE Board Pattern) [Class # XII] 68
Solution of Mock Test-2 & 3 (CBSE Pattern)

Regulars ..........

DYNAMIC PHYSICS 14

8-Challenging Problems [Set # 10]
Students Forum
Physics Fundamentals
Matter Waves, Photo-electric Effect
Thermal Expansion, Thermodynamics

CATALYSE CHEMISTRY 29

Key Concept
Carbonyl Compound
Co-ordination Compound &
Metallurgy
Understanding : Physical Chemistry

DICEY MATHS 36
Mathematical Challenges
Students Forum
Key Concept
Integration
Trigonometrical Equation
Study Time........
Test Time ..........

25% increase in number of girls
from Bombay zone for IIT-JEE
There are far more girls set to appear
for the Indian Institute of Technology
Joint Entrance Exam (IIT-JEE) in the
Bombay zone in April 2012 than
before. The number of applications by
girls has increased by nearly 25%
compared to last year. The Bombay
zone includes Maharashtra, Goa,
This year, girls account for nearly
27% of the total candidates applying,
with around 20,300 girls from among
76,600 candidates. The IITs have been
constantly trying to address the
skewed male-female ratio at the IITs.
This is a significant increase, said
AV Mahajan, chairperson for JEE
2012, Bombay zone. One reason for
this could be that it was free for girls
to apply online this year as well as
cheaper to apply offline as compared
to male applicants.
Two IT-BHU students to start
entrepreneurship club for school
students
VARANASI: When they cracked IIT-
JEE two years ago, getting attractive
jobs in top IT companies was their
dream. Now, they want to promote
entrepreneurial skills in young school
children (Class X onwards) by
establishing entrepreneurship club for
schools.
Bhanu Swami and Varun Agrawal, B
Tech (III) students of electrical
engineering of Institute of
Technology, Banaras Hindu
University (IT-BHU), are on their way
to launch country's first entrepre-
neurship club targeting students (Class
X onwards). The initiative not only
aims at tapping and promoting
entrepreneurial skills in young
students, but also promises to turn
these students into entrepreneurs. This
way they would become job providers
rather than job seekers.
Akash 2 tablet to be launched by
April 2012: Govt.
The government has expressed
confidence it will be successful in
bringing out the improved version of
the Aakash tablet by April this year.
The Aakash 2 is likely to have several
improved specifications such as
elongated battery life and faster
processor. The government has been
striving hard to make its Aakash project
successful. The device, which is also
touted as the world's cheapest tablet,
faced harsh criticism from several
quarters for its poor quality and dismal
features.
IIT Rajasthan, which developed the
prototype of the device along with Data
Wind, found a series of faults in the
device, prompting the government to
reconsider extension of the LC to the
Canadian company. Under pressure to
provide better endowed low-cost
device, the government has now its
turned attention to the Aakash 2, which
is likely to come at the same price tag
of the original Aakash.
HRD Minister Kapil Sibal has said that
the government will be looking for
more manufacturers to manufacture the
Aakash 2 tablets, attributing
the massive demand for the move.
We want to make sure that the
upgraded product caters to the need of
the customers... We have involved ITI
in order to upgrade it... We will be able
to bring in Aakash-II by April," Kapil
Sibal said.
Last week media reports
had hinted that the government might
shelve its Aakash project in view of the
harsh criticism from most quarters. The
reports were triggered by DataWind's
opposition to certain test criteria
suggested by the IIT. Read our previous
coverage

IIT Techfest 2012 : All about
Robotics
One of the highlights of the Techfest
2012, which held at IIT Bombay,
was its international exhibitions
arena. Evidently dominated by
robots, the robotic section had
covered several aspects - humanoid,
surveillance, educational and
industrial. The robotic platform at the
Techfest 2012 showcased bots
expressing emotions, playing
intelligent games and serving as a
model for military training, among
others. With a great potential for
applications in future in varying
fields, lets look at these robots one
by one.
Enjoy Moneycontrol.com on iPad
and be prepared for a fantastic
experience. Get real time stock
quotes, interactive charts, market
buzz, and watch CNBC-TV18,
CNBC Awaaz live on your iPad.
Check out the free moneycontrol app

IIT-KGP celebrates the 9
th

annual Alumni Meet 2012 while
its alumni commits to give back
to their Alma meter
IIT Kharagpur celebrated its 9th
Annual Alumni Meet. While it
honoured its alumni with the
Distinguished Service Award more
alumni committed towards the cause
of contributing to their Alma mater.
A galaxy of alumni from world wide
graced the 3-day dynamic event
Auto Expo 2012 : Hydrogen-
powered 3-wheeler at expo
NEW DELHI: The world's first
hydrogen-powered three-wheeler,
'HyAlfa', was showcased at theAuto
Expo on Monday. Part of a
development project dubbed 'DelHy
3w', a fleet of 15 HyAlfa three-
wheelers will run on an experimental
basis at Pragati Maidan, where a
hydrogen refuelling station has also
been set up.
India Trade Organisation Promotion
( ITPO) will use the vehicles on an
experimental basis. The HyAlfa has
been developed under a joint project
by the United Nations Industrial
Development Organisation ( UNIDO)
International Centre for Hydrogen
Energy Technologies ( ICHET),
Mahindra & Mahindra and IIT-Delhi,
with support from the Ministry of
New and Renewable Energy. "The
aim of this project is to convert
vehicles so that they can carry and use
hydrogen - a carbon-free fuel - and
thus remove all pollutants," Mahindra
& Mahindra president (automotive)
Pawan Goenka said. He said the
vehicle is not yet ready for
commercial production and further
fine-tuning will be required before
moving in that direction. "Moreover,
we also have to look at commercial
viability of running a hydrogen-
powered three-wheeler as the cost of
hydrogen will be around Rs 250 per kg,
which is not affordable at all," he said.
This is a step in the right direction.
Finally India Inc. with support from
the likes of MNRE etc. is making
headway in vehicles driven by
alternative energy sources. Jury is still
out on whether Hydrogen is the way
of the future. Judging by the progress
made in the USA and Germany on
Hydrogen powered vehicles, we are
not quite there yet. There are not only
supply chain challenges, but
Hydrogen continues to be a costly
proposition. You can either produce
Hydrogen from hydrocarbon cracking
(which in turn has dependence on
fossil fuels) or by splitting of water
through electrolysis. This itself
requires around 5-6 kWh of
electricity. So unless the electricity
source is a renewable source such as
solar or wind, the electricity required
to split water itself is most likely to
come from thermal power plants,
thereby not giving any benefit.
However, as everyone knows, human
ingenuity knows no bounds and
technologies only develop
incrementally. I firmly believe that we
are one step away from a miracle
where both Hydrogen consumption
(by means of fuel cells etc.) and
Hydrogen generation (by means of
hydrocarbon cracking or
electrolyzing/splitting water) become
viable for mass production and
consumption. In the short term, we can
and must focus immediately on
"Hydrogen supplementation". By this I
mean - Hydrogen CNG (or HCNG in
short). New Delhi moved to CNG
public transport a while back. In the
short term, this did bring down the
pollution levels and particulate matter
in the atmosphere. After prolonged use,
we are now becoming aware of other
problems such as NOX emissions due
to unclean or inefficient burning of
CNG. NOX is highly carcinogenic and
now the levels of NOX in New Delhi
are far exceeding permissible limits of
WHO. One way to solve this problem is
to supplement CNG with Hydrogen. A
blended product called Hythane (trade
name for HCNG) is already under
experimentation by Indian Oil. In
conclusion, while Hydrogen powered
vehicles are all a step in the right
direction, the government should put
impetus on technologies that are more
feasible in solving current big-city
problems that Indian cities face.
IITian tops CAT 2011
CHENNAI: Ajinkya Deshmukh, an IIT
- Madras graduate, decided to put in
100% effort into preparing for the
Common Admission Test this time, and
got 100 percentile in return. He is one
of nine MBA aspirants in the country to
secure the top score this year. The IIMs
published the CAT 2011 scores on their
website on Wednesday.
On his success, Ajinkya, who wrote the
test for the third time this year, said, "I
always thought I haven't been making a
full effort while preparing or writing
the test. This time I was determined to
give my best. I told myself that I had to
do it this year."
Indian American sworn in as
America's top science official
IIT Madras alumnus, Subra Suresh, has
been sworn in as the director of
America's National Science Foundation
(NSF), the top US science body with a
$7.4 billion budget to support scientific
institutions.

"We are very grateful to have Subra
taking this new task," said President
Barack Obama at the White House
Science after Suresh was sworn in as
the 13th NSF director by John
Holdren, Obama's science advisor.
"He has been at MIT (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology) and has
been leading one of the top
engineering programmes in the
country, and for him now to be able
to apply that to the National Science
Foundation is just going to be
outstanding," he said. "So we're very
grateful for your service."
Suresh, 54, was confirmed by the US
Senate for a six-year term.
He has served as dean of the
engineering school and as Vannevar
Bush Professor of Engineering at
MIT.
A mechanical engineer, who later
became interested in materials
science and biology, Suresh has done
pioneering work studying the
biomechanics of blood cells under
the influence of diseases such as
malaria.
From 2000 to 2006, Suresh served as
the head of the MIT Department of
Materials Science and Engineering.
He joined MIT in 1993 as the R.P.
Simmons Professor of Materials
Science and Engineering and held
joint faculty appointments in the
departments of mechanical
engineering and biological
engineering, as well as the division
of health sciences and technology.
Suresh holds a bachelor's degree
from the Indian Institute of
Technology in Madras and a master's
degree from Iowa State University.
Suresh was nominated by President
Obama to become the new NSF
director in place of Arden L. Bement
Jr, who led the agency from 2004
until he resigned in May this yea

Dr Amitabha Ghosh was the only Asian on NASA's
Mars Pathfinder mission. At present, he is a member of the
Mars Odyssey Mission and the Mars Exploration Rover
Mission.
During the Mars Pathfinder Mission, he conducted
chemical analysis of rocks and soil on the landing site. The
simple and unassuming 34-year-old planetary geologist
has won several accolades, which include the NASA Mars
Pathfinder Achievement Award in 1997 and the NASA
Mars Exploration Rover Achievement Award in 2004.
The journey from India to NASA.
It has been an intriguing experience. I was keen on
geologic research data interpretation and solar system
formation. During my geological research days in India, I
had slept in railway stations while traveling to various
places.
After my post graduation in applied geology from IIT
Kharagpur, I wrote a letter to a professor at NASA
expressing a desire to work at the space agency.
I made certain suggestions; in fact, it was a critical letter.
In India, you can never imagine criticising your professor.
My suggestions were approved, while I got an opportunity
to work at NASA.
I think one requires luck and to put in sincere effort to
achieve one's goals. Being in the right place at the right
time is also important.
In Mumbai for the Pravasi Bharatiya Divas, he spoke
about his work at NASA and his vision for India.
The Vision for India :
I feel there India has a great future. We have world-class
companies. Today, companies like Infosys can be
compared with world leaders like Oracle. Like the
Information Technology revolution, we can have a science
or space revolution. We have the potential to bring about
revolutions in other sectors as well.
How India can we develop science and technology
sector :
It should be treated as a business. There should be more
private participation. We must have an external review to
evaluate the system and make changes as science and
technology can take the country forward.
We must check brain drain. About 80,000 students migrate
to the US for further studies, and settle there. They find the
facilities much better abroad. We need to reverse brain
drain by enhancing and upgrading institutes in India.
The state of space research in India :
I don't want to make controversial statements. All I can say
is India is not at the frontier of space research. We have
made commendable progress but there is a long way to go.
We can do much better. I would be glad to be of help in
any way. Investment in research is investment in
imagination. It is a matter of national pride and internal
recognition. We need to allocate more funds to enhance
research and development work.
We need good educational institutes like IITs and IIMs, but
IITians don't rule the world. You must remember that Microsoft
co-founder (Bill Gates does not have a college degree.
Youngsters must look around for role models and see what
it is that they are doing right. Individuals must make use of
their inherent strengths to succeed.
How can India become a leading global player :
Globalisation will reap huge and long-term benefits and
India must make the best use of the opportunities. At the
PBD seminar, I found people presenting grandiose plans.
Instead, we should look at the realities and immediate
solutions.
The private sector has to be actively involved in the
development of the country and the government has to
respond to the needs of the people. Fifteen years ago, we
didn't have an Infosys, today we have many global
companies.
There should be drastic reduction in paper work. We need
a scenario where one can start any business in a day, like
in the US.
Can India have something like NASA:
The answer is: Yes, India can. All it requires is the right
kind of investment, infrastructure, people and support from
the government.

Success Story
Success Story
This article contains stories/interviews of persons who succeed after graduation from different IITs
Dr. Amitabha Ghosh
Post graduation in applied
geology from IIT Kharagpur,
Working at NASA

PHYSICS

1. A large open top container of negligible mass and
uniform cross-sectional area A has a small holes of
cross-sectional area A/100 in its side wall near the
bottom. The container is kept on a smooth horizontal
floor and contains a liquid of density and mass m
0
.
Assuming that the liquid starts flowing out
horizontally through the hole at t = 0, Calculate
[IIT-1997]
(i) the acceleration of the container, and
(ii) its velocity when 75% of the liquid has drained
out.
Sol. (i) Let at any instant of time during the flow, the
height of liquid in the container is x. The velocity
of flow of liquid through small hole in the orifice
by Toricelli's theorem is
v = gx 2 ...(i)
The mass of liquid flowing per second through the
orifice
= volume of liquid flowing per second

dt
dm
= gx 2
100
A
...(iii)
Therefore the rate of charge of momentum of the
system in forward direction
=
dt
dm
v =
100
A gx 2
(From (i) and (ii))
The rate of charge of momentum of the system in
the backward direction
= Force on backward direction = m a where m is
mass of liquid in the container at the instant t
m = Vol. density
= A x

x

v

The rate of charge of momentum of the
system in the backward direction
Ax a
By conservation of linear momentum
Axp a =
100
gxA 2

a =
50
g

(ii) By toricell's theorem v' = ) h 25 . 0 ( g 2 where
h is the initial height of the liquid in the container
m
0
is the initial mass
m0 = Ah h =
A
m
0

v' =

A
m
25 . 0 g 2
0
=
A 2
gm
0

2. Two parallel plate capacitors A and B have the same
separation d = 8.85 10
4
m between the plates. The
plate area of A and B are 0.04 m
2
and 0.02 m
2
respectively. A slab of dielectric constant (relative
permittivity) K = 9 has dimensions such that it can
exactly fill the space between the plates of capacitor
B. [IIT-1993]

A
110 V
B
(c)
A
(b) (a)
B

(i) The dielectric slab is placed inside A as shown
in figure (a). A is then charged to a potential
difference of 110 V. Calculate the capacitance
of A and the energy stored in it.
(ii) The battery is disconnected and then the
dielectric slab is moved from A. Find the work
done by the external agency in removing the
slab from A.
(iii) The same dielectric slab is now placed inside
B, filling it completely. The two capacitors A
and B are then connected as shown in figure
(c). Calculate the energy stored in the system.
KNOW IIT-JEE
By Previous Exam Questions
Sol. (i) The capacitor A with dielectric slab can be
considered as two capacitors in parallel, one
having dielectric slab and one not having dielectric
slab each capacitor has an area of
2
A
. The
combined capacitance is

A
110 V
+
+ + + +
+
A/2 A/2

C = C
1
+ C
2

=
d
) 2 / A (
0
+
d
r ) 2 / A (
0

=
d 2
A
0
[1 +
r
]
=
4
12
10 85 . 8 2
10 85 . 8 4 . 0

[1 + 9] = 2 10
9
F
Energy stored
=
2
1
CV
2
=
2
1
2 10
9
(110)
2
= 1.21 10
5
J
(ii) Work done in removing the dielectric state =
(Energy stored in capacitor without dielectric)
(Energy stored in capacitor with dielectric).
It may be noted that while taking out the dielectric
the charge on the capacitor plate remains the same.
W =
' C 2
q
2

C 2
q
2

Here, C = 2 10
9
F,
C' =
d
A
0
=
4
14
10 85 . 8
10 85 . 8 04 . 0

= 0.4 10
9
F
q = CV = 2 10
9
110 = 2.2 10
7
C
W =
(
9 9
2 7
10 2
1
10 4 . 0
1
2
) 10 2 . 2 (

=
(

4 . 0 2
4 . 0 2
10 2
10 2 . 2 2 . 2
9
14

= 1.21
4 . 0
6 . 1
10
5
= 4.84 10
5
J
(iii) The capacitance of B =
d
A
B r 0

=
4
12
10 85 . 8
02 . 0 9 10 85 . 8

C
B
= 1.8 10
9
F
The charge on A, q
A
= 2.2 10
7
C gets distributed
into two parts.
q
1
+ q
2
= 2.2 10
7
C Also the potential
difference across A = p.d. across B

A
1
C
q
=
B
2
C
q

q
1
=
B
A
C
C
. q
2
=
9
9
10 8 . 1
10 4 . 0
. q
2
= 0.22 q
2

0.22 q
2
+ q
2
= 2.2 10
7

q
2
=
22 . 1
2 . 2
10
7
= 1.8 10
7
C
q
1
= 0.4 10
7
C
Total energy stored
=
A
2
1
C 2
q
+
B
2
2
C 2
q

=
9
14
10 4 . 0 2
10 4 . 0 4 . 0

+
8
14
10 8 . 1 2
10 8 . 1 8 . 1

= 0.2 10
5
+ 0.9 10
5
= 1.1 10
5
J.

3. A particles of mass m = 1.6 10
27
kg and charge q =
1.6 10
19
C enters a region of uniform magnetic
field of strength 1 Tesla along the direction shown in
figure. The speed of the particle is 10
7
m/s. (i) the
magnetic field is directed along the inward normal to
the plane of the paper. The particle leaves the region
of the field at the point F. Find the distance EF and
the angle . (ii) If the direction of the field is along
the outward normal to the plane of the paper, find the
time spent by the particle in the region of the
magnetic field after entering it at E. [IIT-1984]

F
E
45

Sol. (a) m = 1.6 10
27
kg, q = 1.6 10
19
C
B = 1 T, v = 10
7
m/s
F = q . v B sin
(acting towards O by Fleming's left hand rule)
F = qvB [Q = 90]
But F = ma
qvB = ma
a =
m
qvB

=
27
7 19
10 6 . 1
1 10 10 6 . 1

= 10
15
m/s
2


O
F

E
45
45
2
V
V
2
=

2
V
V
2
=

This is the centripetal acceleration

r
v
2
= 10
15
OEF = 45
(Q OE, act as a radius)
r =
15
14
10
10
= 0.1 m By symmetry
OFE = 45
EOF = 90 (by Geometry)
If the magnetic field is in the outward direction
and the particle enters in the same way at E, then
according to Fleming's Left hand rule, the particle
will turn towards clockwise direction and cover
3/4
th
of a circle as shown in the figure.

45
45
E
O
45
F

Time required =
(
v
r 2
4
3
= 4.71 10
8
sec.

4. A long solenoid of radius 'a' and number of turns
per unit length n is enclosed by cylindrical shell of
radius R, thickness d(d<<R) and length L. A
variable current i = i
0
sin t flows through the coil.
If the resitivity of the material of cylindrical shell is
, find the induced current in the shell. [IIT-2005]
Sol. The magnetic field in the solenoid is given by
B =
0
ni

a
L
d
R

B =
0
n i
0
sin t [Q i = i
0
sin t given]
The magnetic flux linked with the solenoid
=
B .
A = BA cos 90
= (
0
n i
0
sin t) (a
2
)
The rate of change of magnetic flux through the
solenoid

dt
d
=
0
n a
2
i
0
cos t
The same rate of change of flux is linked with the
cylindrical shell. By the principle of electromagetic
induction, the induced emf produced in the
cylinderical shell is
I
TOP VIEW

e =
dt
d
=
0
n a
2
i
0
cos t ...(i)
The resistance offered by the cylindrical shell to the
flow of induced current I will be
R =
A
l

Here, l = 2R,
A = L d
R =
Ld
R 2
...(ii)
The induced current I will be
I =
R
| e |
=
R 2
Ld ] t cos i na [
0
2
0

I =
R 2
Ld t cos i na
0
2
0

Ans.

5. A particle of charge equal to that of an electron, e,
and mass 208 times the mass of the electron (called a
nu-meson) moves in a circular orbit around a nucleus
of charge + 3e. (Take the mass of the nucleus to be
infinite). Assuming that the bohr model of the atom is
applicable to this system.
(i) Derive an expression for the radius of the nth
Bohr orbit.
(ii) Find the value of n for which the radius of the
orbit is approximately the same as that of the first
Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom.
(iii) Find the wavelength of the radiation emitted
when the mu-meson jumps from the third orbit of
the first orbit. [IIT-1988]
Sol. (i) Let m be the mass of electron. Then the mass
of mu-meson is 208 m. According to Bohr's
postualte, the angular momentum of mu-meson
should be an integral multiple of h/2.

+3e
e
r

(208 m) vr =
2
nh

v =
mr
nh
208 2
=
mr
nh
416

(1)
Since mu-meson is moving in a circular path
therefore it needs centripetal force which is
provided by the electrostatic force between the
nucleus and mu-meson.

r
v ) m 208 (
2
=
0
4
1

2
3
r
e e

r =
2
0
2
mv 208 4
e 3

Substituting the value of v from (1) we get
r =
2 2
0
2
208 4
416 416 3
h n
mr mr e

r =
2
0
2 2
624 me
h n

(2)
(ii) The radius of the first orbit of the hydrogen
atom
=
2
2
0
me
h

(3)
To find the value of n for which the radius of
the orbit is approximately the same as that of
the first Bohr orbit for hydrogen atom, we
equate
equation (2) and (3)

2
0
2 2
624 me
h n
=
2
2
0
me
h
n = 624 25
(iii)
1
= 208 R z
2
(
(
2
2
2
1
1
1
n n

1
= 208 1.097 10
7
3
2
(
2 2
3
1
1
1

= 5.478 10
11
m

CHEMISTRY

6. An organic compound C
x
H
2y
O
y
was burnt with
twice the amount of oxygen needed for complete
combustion to CO
2
and H
2
O. The hot gases, when
cooled to 0 C and 1 atm pressure, measured 2.24
L. The water collected during cooling weighed 0.9
g. The vapour pressure of pure water at 20 C is
17.5 mm Hg and is lowered by 0.104 mm Hg when
50 g of the organic compound is dissolved in 1000
g of water. Give the molecular formula of the
organic compound. [IIT-1983]
Sol. The combustion reaction is
C
x
H
2y
O
y
+ x O
2
x CO
2
+ y H
2
O
To start with, the amount of O
2
taken is 2x. Hence,
after the combustion reaction, we will be left with
the following amounts.
Amount of oxygen left unreacted = x
Amount of carbon dioxide = x
Amount of water = y
When this mixture is cooled to 0 C and 1 atm, we
will be left with oxygen and carbon dioxide. Hence,
the amount 2x occupies the given volume of 2.24 L
at STP. Hence,
Amount x =
1
Lmol 4 . 22
L ) 2 / 24 . 2 (
= 0.05 mol
Now, Mass of water collected = 0.9 g
Amount of water collected,
y =
1
mol g 18
g 9 . 0
= 0.05 mol
Thus, the empirical formula of the compound is
C
0.05
H
2 0.05
O
0.05
, i.e. CH
2
O.
Now, according to Raoult's law

* p
p
= x
2

i.e.
mmHg 5 . 17
mmHg 104 . 0
=
) mol g 18 / g 1000 ( ) M / g 50 (
) M / g 50 (
1
+

Solving for M, we get M = 150.5 g mol
1

Number of repeating units of CH
2
O in the
molecular formula =
16 2 12
5 . 150
+ +
5
Hence, Molecular formula of the compound is
C
5
H
10
O
5
.

7. The oxides of sodium and potassium contained in a
0.5 g sample of feldspar were converted to the
respective chlorides. The weight of the chlorides
thus obtained was 0.1180 g. Subsequent treatment
of the chlorides with silver nitrate gave 0.2451 g of
silver chloride. What is the percentage of Na
2
O and
K
2
O in the mixture ? [IIT-1979]
Sol. Mass of sample of feldspar containing Na
2
O and
K
2
O = 0.5 g.
According to the question,
Na
2
O + 2HCl 2NaCl + H
2
O ..(1)
2 23 + 16 = 62g 2(23 + 35.5) = 117 g
K
2
O + 2HCl 2KCl + H
2
O ...(2)
2 39 + 16 = 94g 2(39 + 35.5) = 149 g
Mass of chlorides = 0.1180 g
Let, Mass of NaCl = x g
Mass of KCl = (0.1180 x)g
Again, on reaction with silver nitrate,
NaCl + AgNO
3
AgCl + NaNO
3
...(3)
23 + 35.5 = 58.5g 108 + 35.5 = 143.5g
KCl + AgNO
3
AgCl + KNO
3
...(4)
39 + 35.5 = 74.5g 108 + 35.5 = 143.5g
Total mass of AgCl obtained = 0.2451 g
Step 1. From eq. (3)
58.5 g of NaCl yields = 143.5 g AgCl
x g of NaCl yields =
5 . 58
5 . 143
x g AgCl
And from eq. (4),
74.5 g of KCl yields = 143.5 g of AgCl
(0.1180 x)g of KCl yields
=
5 . 74
5 . 143
(0.1180 x)g AgCl
Total mass of AgCl

5 . 58
5 . 143
x +
5 . 74
5 . 143
(0.1180 x) = 0.2451
which gives, x = 0.0342
Hence, Mass of NaCl = x = 0.0342 g
And Mass of KCl = 0.1180 0.0342 = 0.0838g
Step 2. From eq.(1),
117 g of NaCl is obtained from = 62 g Na
2
O
0.0342 g NaCl is obtained from
=
117
62
0.032 = 0.018 g Na
2
O
From eq. (2),
149 g of KCl is obtained from = 94 g K
2
O
0.0838 g of KCl is obtained from
=
149
94
0.0838 = 0.053 g K
2
O
Step 3. % of Na
2
O in feldspar =
5 . 0
018 . 0
100
= 3.6%
% of K
2
O in feldspar =
5 . 0
053 . 0
100 = 10.6 %

8. 5 ml of 8 N of nitric acid, 4.8 ml of 5 N
hydrochloric acid and a certain volume of 17 M
sulphuric acid are mixed together and made upto 2
litre. 30 ml of this mixture exactly neutralizes 42.9
ml of sodium carbonate solution containing one
gram of Na
2
CO
3
.10H
2
O in 100 ml of water.
Calculate the amount in grams of the sulphate ions
in solution. [IIT-1985]
Sol. Given that,

3
HNO
N = 8 N

3
HNO
V = 5 ml
N
HCl
= 5 N
V
HCl
= 4.8 ml

4 2
SO H
M = 17 M
Step 1. Meq. of HNO
3
in 2L solution
=
3
HNO
N
3
HNO
V
= 8 5 = 40
Meq. of HNO
3
in 30 ml solution
=
2000
40
30 = 0.6
Step 2. Meq. of HCl in 2L solution
= N
HCl
V
HCl

= 5 4.8 = 24
Meq. of HCl in 30 ml solution
=
2000
24
30 = 0.36
Step 3. Meq. of H
2
SO
4
in 2L solution
= Valency factor
4 2
SO H
M
4 2
SO H
V
= 2 17
4 2
SO H
V
Meq. of H
2
SO
4
in 30 ml solution
=
2000
30 V 34
4 2
SO H

= 0.51
4 2
SO H
V
Step 4. Also given that,
Volume of Na
2
CO
3
.10H
2
O = 100 ml
Mass of Na
2
CO
3
.10H
2
O = 1 g
Equivalent mass of Na
2
CO
3
.10H
2
O
=
2
mass Molecular
=
2
286
= 143 g equiv
1

We know,
Normality
=
(ml) Volume solute of mass Equivalent
1000 solute of Mass

=
100 143
1000 1
= 0.070 N
Meq. of Na
2
CO
3
.10H
2
O
=
O H 10 . CO Na
2 3 2
N
O H 10 . CO Na
2 3 2
V
= 0.070 42.9 = 3.003
Step 5. 1 gram equivalent acid neutralizes 1 gram
equivalent of base.
0.6 + 0.36 + 0.51
4 2
SO H
V = 3.003
Solving ,
4 2
SO H
V = 4 ml
Step 6. 1000 ml of 1 M H
2
SO
4
contains
= 96 g SO
4
2
ions
4ml of 17 M H
2
SO
4
contains =
1000
4 17 96

= 6.528g SO
4
2
ions
9. The equilibrium constant K
p
of the reaction
2SO
2
(g) + O
2
(g) 2SO
3
(g) is 900 atm
1
at
800 K. A mixture containing SO
3
and O
2
having
initial partial pressures of 1 atm and 2 atm,
respectively, is heated at constant volume to
equilibrate. Calculate the pressure of each gas at
800 K. [IIT- 1989]
Sol. Since to start with SO
2
is not present, it is expected
that some of SO
3
will decompose to give SO
2
and
O
2
at equilibrium. If 2x is the partial pressure of
SO
3
that is decreased at equilibrium, we would
have
2SO
2
(g) + O
2
(g) 2SO
3
(g)
t = 0 0 2 atm 1 atm
t
eq
2x 2 atm + x 1 atm 2x
Hence, K
p
=
) p ( ) p (
) p (
2 2
3
O
2
SO
2
SO
=
) x atm 2 ( ) x 2 (
) x 2 atm 1 (
2
2
+

= 900 atm
1

Assuming x << 2 atm, we get

) atm 2 ( ) x 2 (
) x 2 atm 1 (
2
2
= 900 atm
1

or
2
2
) x 2 (
) x 2 atm 1 (
= 1800
or
x 2
atm 1
1 = 42.43
or x =
43 . 43 2
1
atm = 0.0115 atm

Hence, p(SO
2
) = 2x = 0.023 atm;
p(O
2
) = 2atm + x = 2.0115 atm and
p(SO
3
) = 1 atm 2x = 0.977 atm

10. A white substance (A) reacts with dil. H
2
SO
4
to
produce a colourless gas (B) and a colourless
solution (C). The reaction between (B) and
acidified K
2
Cr
2
O
7
solution produces a green
solution and a slightly coloured precipitate (D). The
substance (D) burns in air to produce a gas (E)
which reacts with (B) to yield (D) and a colourless
liquid. Anhydrous copper sulphate is turned blue on
addition of this colourless liquid. Addition of
aqueous NH
3
or NaOH to (C) produces first a
precipitate, which dissolves in the excess of the
respective reagent to produce a clear solution in
each case. Identify (A), (B), (C), (D) and (E). Write
the equations of the reactions involved. [IIT-2001]
Sol. (A) is ZnS,

) A (
ZnS+ H
2
SO
4

) C (
4
ZnSO +
) B (
2
S H

) B (
2
S H 3 + K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ 4H
2
SO
4
K
2
SO
4
+ Cr
2
(SO
4
)
3

+ 7H
2
O +
) D (
grey White
S 3

) D (
S +
Air
2
O
) E (
2
SO

) E (
2
SO +
) B (
2
S H 2
) C ( liquid Colourless
2
O H 2 +
) (D
S 3
5H
2
O +
White
4
CuSO
Blue
2 4
O H 5 . CuSO
ZnSO
4
+ 2NaOH Zn(OH)
2
+ Na
2
SO
4

Zn(OH)
2
+ 2NaOH Na
2
ZnO
2
(soluble) + 2H
2
O
Also in excess of NH
4
OH it forms soluble
complex [Zn(NH
3
)
4
](OH)
2
.

MATHEMATICS

11. If f (x) is twice differentiable function such that
f (a) = 0, f (b) = 2, f (c) = 1, f (d) = 2, f (e) = 0,
where a < b < c < d < e, then the minimum number
of zero's of g(x) = {f ' (x)}
2
+ f '' (x). f (x) in the
interval [a, e] is? [IIT-2006]
Sol. Let, g(x) =
dx
d
[f (x) . f '(x)]
to get the zero of g(x) we take function
h(x) = f (x). f ' (x)
between any two roots of h(x) there lies at least
one root of h' (x) = 0
g(x) = 0 h(x) = 0 f (x) = 0 or f ' (x) = 0
If f (x) = 0 has 4 minimum solutions.
f ' (x) = 0 has 3 minimum solutions.
h(x) = 0 has 7 minimum solutions.
h' (x) = g(x) = 0 has 6 minimum solutions

12. The position vectors of the vertices A, B and C of a
tetrahedron ABCD are
^
i +
^
j +
^
k ,
^
i and 3
^
i ,
respectively. The altitude from vertex D to the
opposite face ABC meets the median line through
A of the triangle ABC at a point E. If the length of
the side AD is 4 and the volume of the tetrahedron
is
3
2 2
, find the position vector of the point E for
all its possible positions. [IIT-1996]
Sol. F is mid-point of BC i.e., F
2
3
^ ^
i i+
= 2
^
i
and AE DE (given)

A(i + j + k)
D
C(3i)
F(2i) B(i)
E
1

Let E divides AF in : 1. The position vector of E
is given by

1
) ( 1 2
^ ^ ^ ^
+
+ + + k j i i
=
^
1
1 2
i |
.
|
\
|
+
+
+
^
1
1
j
+
+
^
1
1
k
+

Now, volume of the tetrahedron
=
3
1
(area of the base) (height)

3
2 2
=
3
1
(area of the ABC) (DE)
But area of the ABC = | ) ( |
2
1

BA BC
= | ) ( 2 |
2
1 ^ ^ ^
k j i + = | ) |
^ ^ ^ ^
k i j i +
= | ) |
^ ^
j k = 2
Therefore,
3
2 2
=
3
1
) 2 ( (DE)
DE = 2
Since ADE is a right angle triangle,
AD
2
= AE
2
+ DE
2

(4)
2
= AE
2
+ (2)
2

AE
2
= 12
But
AE =
^
1
1 2
i
+
+
+
^
1
1
j
+
+
^
1
1
k
+
) (
^ ^ ^
k j i + +
=
^
1
i
+

^
1
j
+

^
1
k
+

2
| |
AE =
2
) 1 (
1
+
[
2
+
2
+
2
] =
2
2
) 1 (
3
+

Therefore, 12 =
2
2
) 1 (
3
+

4( + 1)
2
=
2

4
2
+ 4 + 8 =
2

3
2
+ 8 + 4 = 0
3
2
+ 6 + 2 + 4 = 0
3( + 2) + 2( + 2) = 0
(3 + 2) ( + 2) = 0
= 2/3, = 2
Therefore, when = 2/3, position vector of E is
given by

^
1
1 2
i |
.
|
\
|
+
+
+
^
1
1
j
+
+
^
1
1
k
+

=
^
1 3 / 2
1 ) 3 / 2 .( 2
i
+
+
+
^
1 3 / 2
1
j
+
+
^
1 3 / 2
1
k
+

=
^
3
3 2
1 3 / 4
i
+
+
+
^
3
3 2
1
j
+
+
^
3
3 2
1
k
+

=
^
3 / 1
3
3 4
i
+
+
^
3 / 1
1
j +
^
3 / 1
1
k
=
^
i +
^
3j +
^
3k
and when = 2
Position vector of E is given by,

^
1 2
1 ) 2 ( 2
i
+
+
+
^
1 2
1
j
+
+
^
1 2
1
k
+
=
^
1
1 4
i
+
^
j
^
k
=
^
3i
^
j
^
k
Therefore,
^
i +
^
3j +
^
3k and +
^
3i
^
j
^
k are
the position vector of E.

13. Evaluate

|
.
|
\
|
+
+
3 /
3 /
3
3
| | cos 2
4
x
x
dx [IIT-2004]
Sol. Let,
I =

|
.
|
\
|
+
3 /
3 /
3
| | cos 2 x
dx
+ 4

|
.
|
\
|
+
3 /
3 /
3
3
| | cos 2 x
dx x

Using
a
a
x f ) ( dx=
(
(
=
=
) ( ) ( , ) ( 2
) ( ) ( , 0
0
x f x f dx x f
x f x f
a

I = 2
|
.
|
\
|
+
3 /
0
3
| | cos 2 x
dx
+ 0

|
.
|
\
|
+

3 /
3 /
3
3
| | cos 2
odd is
x
dx x
as
I = 2
+
3 /
0 ) 3 / cos( 2 x
dx

= 2

3 / 2
3 / cos 2 t
dt
, where x +
3
= t
= 2
+
3 / 2
3 /
2
2
2
tan 3 1
2
sec
t
dt
t

= 2
+
3
3 / 1
2
3 1
2
u
du
=
3
4
. { }
3
3 / 1
1
3 tan 3 u

=
3
4
(tan
1
3 tan
1
1) =
3
4
tan
1
|
.
|
\
|
2
1

|
.
|
\
|
+
+
3 /
3 /
3
3
| | cos 2
4
x
x
dx =
3
4
tan
1
|
.
|
\
|
2
1
.
14. An unbiased die, with faces numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, is thrown n times and the list on n numbers
showing up is noted. What is the probability that
among the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 only three
numbers appear in this list ? [IIT-2001]
Sol. Let us define at onto function F from A : [r
1
, r
2
...
r
n
] to B : [1, 2, 3] where r
1
r
2
.... r
n
are the readings
of n throws and 1, 2, 3 are the numbers that appear
in the n throws.
Number of such functions,
M = N [n(1) n(2) + n(3)]
where N = total number of functions and
n(t) = number of function having exactly t elements
in the range.
Now, N = 3
n
, n(1) = 3.2
n
, n(2) = 3, n(3) = 0
M = 3
n
3.2
n
+ 3
Hence the total number of favourable cases
= (3
n
3.2
n
+ 3).
6
C
3

Required probability =
n
n n
C
6
) 3 2 . 3 3 (
3
6
+

15. Show that the value of tanx/tan3x, wherever defined
never lies between 1/3 and 3. [IIT-1992]
Sol. y =
x
x
3 tan
tan
=
x
x x
x
2
3
tan 3 1
tan tan 3
tan

=
x x
x x
3
2
tan tan 3
) tan 3 1 ( tan

=
x
x
2
2
tan 3
tan 3 1
[Q tan 3x 0 3x 0]
x 0
tan x 0

0

+
+
3 1/3

Let tan x = t
y =
2
2
3
3 1
t
t

3y t
2
y = 1 3t
2

3y 1 = t
2
y 3t
2

3y 1 = t
2
(y 3)

3
1 3
y
y
= t
2

3
1 3
y
y
0, t
2
0 t R
y ( , 1/3) (3, )
Therefore, y is not defined in between (1/3, 3).

Physics Facts

Nuclear Physics
1. Alpha particles are the same as helium nuclei and have the symbol .
1. The atomic number is equal to the number of protons (2 for alpha)
2. Deuterium ( ) is an isotope of hydrogen ( )
3. The number of nucleons is equal to protons + neutrons (4 for alpha)
4. Only charged particles can be accelerated in a particle accelerator such as a cyclotron or Van Der Graaf
generator.
5. Natural radiation is alpha ( ), beta ( ) and gamma (high energy x-rays)
6. A loss of a beta particle results in an increase in atomic number.
7. All nuclei weigh less than their parts. This mass defect is converted into binding energy. (E=mc
2
)
8. Isotopes have different neutron numbers and atomic masses but the same number of protons (atomic
numbers).
9. Geiger counters, photographic plates, cloud and bubble chambers are all used to detect or observe radiation.

1. A particle of charge Q and of negligible initial speed
is accelerated through a potential difference of U.
The particle reaches a region of uniform magnetic
field of induction B, where it undergoes circular
motion. If potential difference is doubled & B is also
doubled then magnetic moment of the circular
current due to circular motion of charge Q will
become
(A) double (B) half
(C) four times (D) remain same

2. Three long rod AA, AB, CC are moving with a
speed v in a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular
to the plane of paper as shown in figure. The
triangle formed between the three wires is always an
equilateral triangle. If resistance per unit length of
wire is , then the induced current in the triangle is
A B
C
A
C
B
v
v
B
0

B
0

v

(A)
3
v B
0
(B)
3
v B 2
0

(C)
3
v B
0
(D)
v B
0

3. In the diagram shown, the wires P
1
Q
1
and P
2
Q
2
are
made to slide on the rails with same speed of 5m/s.
In this region a magnetic field of 1T exists. The
electric current in 9 resistor is
P
1
P
2

Q
2
Q
1

2 2
9
4cm

(A) zero if both wires slide towards left
(B) zero if both wires slide in opposite direction
(C) 0.2mA if both wires move towards left
(D) 0.2mA if both wires move in opposite direction

4. A circular current loop is shown in the adjacent
figure. The magnetic field in the region is along x-
axis and its magnitude in the space is increasing
with increasing y-coordinate. The net magnetic
force on the loop is
y
B
x

(A) along + z-axis (B) along z-axis
(C) along +y-axis (D) None of these

5. A point charge q moves from A to B along a
parabolic path (AB is latus rectum). Electric field is
along x-axis. The work done by the field is

y
2
= 4ax
x
E
A B
y

(A) qEa (B) 2qEa
(C) +qeA (D) 2qEa

6. In a cylindrical zone of radius R, magnetic field
B is
present perpendicular to the plane of the paper into it.
Magnitude of
B is varying with time as B

0
(p + qt)
where p & q are positive constant. Consider a static
triangle loop OAM. Emf induced in the triangular loop

This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in physics, that would be very helpful in facing IIT
JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and we
hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Dev Sharma
Director Academics, Jodhpur Branch
Physics Challenging Problems
Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
Set # 10

A
M
O B
R
60
60

(A)
3
qR B 2
2
0
(B)
3
qR B
2
0

(C)
3
PR B
2
0
(D)
2
R PB
2
0

7. Consider cylindrical region of the magnetic field
shown in the figure. Region I and II have fields
directed perpendicularly outward and inward
respectively. Fields are varying with time as
Region I : B = 3B
0
t
Region II : B = B
0
t
There is no net induced electric field in the region
outside the magnetic field then the ratio of =
|
|
.
|
\
|
2
1
2
r
r

Region II

Region I
r
1

r
2

8. Match the column:
Column I Column II
(A) In a series RLC (P) Z may increase
circuit if C decreases
(B) In a series RLC (Q) Z may decrease
circuit if L increases
(C) In a series RLC (R) resonance
circuit if R decreases frequency increases
(D) In a series RLC (S) power factor
circuit if C increases decrease

After travelling 2.4 billion miles in just over 6
years to reach Jupiter, Galileo missed its target at
the Jovian moon Io by only 67 miles. That's like
shooting an arrow from Los Angeles at a
bull's-eye in New York and missing by only 6
inches!
Utopia ia a large, smooth lying area of Mars.
The biggest star has a diameter of 1800 million
miles, making it 2000 times bigger than the Sun.
15% of the world's fresh water flows doen the
Amazon.
In 1995, each American used an annual average
of 731 pounds of paper, more than double the
amount used in the 1980's. Contrary to
predictions that computers would displace paper,
consumption is growing.
The term 'black hole' was coined in 1968 when
John Wheeler described how an in-falling object
'becomes dimmer millisecond by
millisecond...light and particles incident from
outside...go down the black hole only to add to
its mass and increase its gravitational attraction.'
The 'Red Planet' isn't really red at all, Nasa
photographs indicate that it is more of a tan or
butterscotch colour.
The International Space Station orbits at 248
miles above the Earth.
The axis of orbit of the planet Uranus is tilted at a
90 degree angle.
Astronomers have discovered over 10,000
asteroids - but put them together and they would
be smaller than the Moon.
Have you ever seen a ring around the moon?
Folklore has it that this means bad weather is
coming.

1. For the process
B A

V
M
1
RT
2
3 1
U

or T V
So AB is isobaric process (pressure in constant)

(
= =
A 0
0
A
RT
2
3
U 4 As
R 3
U 8
T

0
A
2
M
V
=

so
M 3
U 16
P
0 0
A
=
and
0
B
4
M
V
=

so WAB = P[V
B
- V
A
]

0
0 0
0 0
0 0
4
M
M 3
U 16
2
M
4
M
M 3
U 16
=
(

Option [D] is correct

2. The slope of the graph is
0
0
V 2
P
m =

The equation of this graph is given by

2
P 3
V 2
V P
P
0
0
0
+ =

2
P 3
V 2
V P
V
nRT
0
0
0
+
=

V
nR 2
P 3
V
nRV 2
V P
T
0 2
0
0
+
=

0
nR 2
P 3
nRV 2
V P 2
dV
dT
0
0
0 0
= +
=

2
V 3
V
nR 2
P 2
nRV
V P
0 0
0
0
= =

At
,
2
V 3
V
0
=
temp will be maximum [n = 1]

2
V 3
R 2
P 3
4
V 9
RV 2
P
T
0 0
2
0
0
0
max
+ =

R
V P
4
9
R
V P
8
9
0 0 0 0
+

R
V P
8
9
0 0

Option [C] is correct

3. TV
-3
= k
k V
nR
PV
3
=

for this polytrophic process, PV
-2
= constant
so x = -2

0
1 2 1 2
nRT
3
2
3
) T T ( nR
x 1
) T T ( nR
w =
=

U = nC
V
T = n 3/2 R(3T
0
T
0
) = 3nRT
0

0 0
nRT
3
11
nRT 3
3
2
W U Q = |
.
|
\
|
+ = = =

Q = nCT
R
6
11
) T 2 ( n
nRT
3
11
T n
Q
C
0
0
= =
=

Option [A,C,D] is correct
4.
y
R
F
F
x
F
y
t
x
F = m
2
R
F
y
= F sin t
Fy = m
2
R sin (t)

* In figure as cos t =
R
x

t cos R x =

* For one complete circle,
t =

*
y
R
v
x
t
x v
x
= R sin t
v = R

Option [A,C] is correct
5. From 1
st
law,
Q = U + W
nCT + nC
v
T + pV
nCT = nC
V
T + nRT/V V

V e T
V
nRT
V e T C V e T n
V
0
V
0 V
V
0
+ =

C = C
V
+ R/V C = C
V
+ R/V

Option [B] is correct
6. Option [C] is correct
7. Option [B] is correct
8. Option [D] is correct
Solution
Physics Challenging Problems
Set # 9
8
Quest i ons were Publ i shed i n January Issue

1. AB and CD are two ideal springs having force constant
K
1
and K
2
respectively. Lower ends of these springs are
attached to the ground so that the springs remain
vertical. A light rod or length 3a is attached with upper
ends B and C of springs. A particle of mass m is fixed
with the rod at a distance a from end B and in
equilibrium, the rod is horizontal. Calculate period of
small vertical oscillations of the system.
B
m
a
2a
C
K
2
K
1

A D

Sol. Let, in equilibrium, compressive forces in left and
right springs be F
1
and F
2
, respectively.
Considering free body diagram of rod BC, (figure)
B
C
F
1

a
mg
2a
F
2

F
1
+ F
2
= mg ...(i)
Taking moments about B,
mg a = F
2
3a
or F
2
=
3
1
mg
Substituting this value in equation (i),
F
1
=
3
2
mg
Let the particle be pressed from its equilibrium
position by applying a force 'F'. Let left and right
springs be further compressed through y
1
and y
2
,
respectively. Increase in compressive forces in the
spring will be K
1
y
1
and K
2
y
2
respectively. In other
words, total compressive forces in two springs will
be (F
1
+ K
1
y
1
) and (F
2
+ K
2
y
2
) respectively.
Now considering new free body diagram (figure) of
the rod BC,
(F
1
+ K
1
y
1
) + (F
2
+ K
2
y
2
) = F + mg ...(ii)
Taking moments about B, (figure)

B
C
(F
1
+ K
1
y
1
)
a
mg
2a
(F
2
+ K
2
y
2
)
F

(F + mg) a = (F
2
+ K
2
y
2
) 3a ...(iii)
Solving above equations,
K
1
y
1
=
3
F 2
and K
2
y
2
=
3
F
.
or y
1
=
1
K 3
F 2
and y
2
=
2
K 3
F

Since, distance of the particle from left spring is 'a'
and that from right spring is '2a', therefore,
downward displacement of the particle from
equilibrium position will be
y =
3
y 2
1
+
3
y
2
=
l
K 9
F 4
+
2
K 9
F
=
2 1
2 1
K K 9
F ) K 4 K ( +

or F =
) K 4 K (
K K 9
2 1
2 1
+
...(iv)
Now, if the particle be released, it starts accelerating
upwards due to excess compressive force in springs.
Hence, the restoring force is (K
1
y
1
+ K
2
y
2
), which is
numerically equal to F.
or Restoring force = F =
) K 4 K (
K K 9
2 1
2 1
+
. y
or Restoring acceleration, a =
m
F
=
) K 4 K ( m
K K 9
2 1
2 1
+
.y
Since, acceleration is restoring and is directly
proportional to displacement y, therefore, the
particle performs SHM. Its period of oscillations is
T =
a
y
2
or T =
2 1
2 1
K K
) K 4 K ( m
3
2 +
Ans.

Experts Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
Students Forum
PHYSI CS
2. A plane spiral coil is made on a thin insulated wire and
has N = 100 turns. Radii of inside and outside turns are
a = 10 cm and b = 20 cm respectively. A magnetic field
normal to the plane of spiral exists in the space. The
magnetic field increases at a constant rate = 0.3
tesla/second. Calculate potential difference between the
ends of the spiral.
Sol. Since, magnetic field is increasing, therefore flux
linked with the coil is also increasing. Due to
increase in flux an emf is induced in it. Potential
difference between ends of the spiral coil is equal to
magnitude of emf induced in it.
Since there are N turns in a radial width (b a),
therefore number of turns in the spiral coil per unit
radial width is
n =
) a b (
N

Consider a concentric circular ring of radius x and
radial thickness dx
Number of turns in this ring = n dx.
Let at some instant magnetic field strength be B,
Flux linked with the ring, = x
2
B
Emf induced in this ring = (n . dx)
dt
d

= (n . dx) |
.
|
\
|
dt
dB
x
2
= n x
2
dx
Total emf induced in the spiral coil,
e =
=
=

b x
a x
2
) dx x n ( =
3
1
n (b
3
a
3
)
Substituting value of n,
e =
3
1
N (a
2
+ b
2
+ ab) = 2.2 volt Ans.

3. A spherical shell of radius R is filled with water.
Temperature of atmosphere is ( ) C. The shell is
exposed to atmosphere and all water comes down to
0C and then it starts freezing from outer surface
towards the centre of the shell. Assuming shell to be
highly conducting, calculate time for whole mass of
water to freeze. Thermal conductivity of ice is K and
latent heat of its fusion is L. Density of water is .
Neglect expansion during freezing.
Sol. Heat flows from water to atmosphere because
atmospheric temperature is below 0C. Water is
filled in spherical shell, therefore heat flows in radial
direction.
Let at some instant t, thickness of ice layer be x.
Then a concentric sphere of radius (R x) is in
liquid form as shown in figure. Heat flows from this
sphere to atmosphere through ice layer.
To calculate rate of heat flow, first we have to
calculate thermal resistance of this ice layer.
Considering a concentric spherical shell of radius r
[(R x) < r < R] and radial thickness dr as shown in
figure.

r
R
(Rx)

Its thermal resistance =
K r 4
dr
2

Total thermal resistance of ice layer

R
) x R (
2
Kr 4
dr
=
) x R ( KR 4
x

Temperature just inside and outside the ice layer is
0C and ( )C, respectively.
Temperature difference = 0 ( q) = C
Hence, rate of heat flow, H =
|
|
.
|
\
|
) x R ( KR 4
x

=
x
) x R ( KR 4

rate of freezing of mass =
L
H

Rate of freezing of volume =
L
H

But it is equal to 4(R x)
2
.
dt
dx

x L
) x R ( KR 4

= 4p (R x)
2
.
dt
dx

or
KR
) x R ( x L
. dx = dt
At instant t = 0, thickness of ice layer was equal to
x = 0 and we have to calculate time t when whole
mass has frozen or when x = R
Substituting these limits,

=
t
0
R
0
dx ) x R ( x
KR
L
dt
or t =
K 6
LR
2
Ans.

4. In a Young's experiment, the upper slit is covered by a
thin glass plate of refractive index
1
= 1.4 while the
lower slit is covered by another glass plate having the
same thickness as the first one but having refractive
index
2
= 1.7. Interference pattern is observed using
light of wavelength = 5400 . It is found that the
point P on the screen where the central maxima fell
before the glass plates ware inserted, now has 3/4 the
original intensity. It is further observed that what used
to be the fifth maxima earlier, lies below the point P
while the sixth minima lies above the point P.
Neglecting absorption of light by glass plates, calculate
thickness of the glass plates.
Sol. If glass plates are not inserted in slits, central
maximum occurs at perpendicular bisector of slits.
Hence, point P lies on perpendicular bisector of S
1
S
2

as shown in figure.

S
1

S
2

P
Screen

When a plate is inserted in upper slit, the
interference pattern shifts upwards and due to plate
inserted in lower slit, it shifts downwards.
Since, distance of nth maxima (nth bright fringe)
from central bright fringe is n, where is fringe
width and fifth maxima now lies below the point P,
therefore, shift of fringe pattern is downwards and it
is greater that 5 .
Since, sixth minima (sixth dark fringe) lies above
point P and distance of m
th
minima from central
bright fringe is |
.
|
\
|
2
1
m , therefore, shift of fringe
pattern is less than 5.5 . Hence, the shift lies
between 5 and 5.5 .
Let intensity of light due to each slit be I
0
. Then
l
1
= l
2
= l
0
.
Since, before insertion of glass plates, a bright fringe
(central bright fringe) was formed at P, therefore,
original intensity at P was equal to I
max
.
But I
max
= (
1
I +
2
I )
2
= 4I
0

But now intensity at P is 3/4 of the original intensity,
therefore now intensity at P is
I = 3/4 I
max
= 3I
0
.
But I = I
1
+ I
2
+
2 1
I I 2 cos where is phase
difference between two rays reaching P.
Substituting I
1
= I
2
= I
0
and I = 3I
0
in above
equation,
cos =
2
1
or = (2n + /3) where n is an integer
But phase difference, = 2
s
where s is shift of
fringe pattern.
Hence, s = |
.
|
\
|
+
6
1
n .
But s lies between 5 and 5.5 , therefore,
s = |
.
|
\
|
+
6
1
5 =
6
31
where =
d
D

s =
d 6
D 31
where D is distance of screen from
slits and d is distance between slits.
Let thickness of each glass plate be t.
Upward shift due to upper glass plate,
s
1
=
d
tD ) 1 (
1

and downward shift due to lower glass plate,
s
2
=
d
tD ) 1 (
2

Resultant downward shift s = s
2
s
1
.
Substituting values of s, s
1
and s
2
,
t =
) ( 6
31
1 2

= 9.3 m Ans.

5. A point isotropic light source of power P = 12 watt is
located on the axis of a circular mirror plate of radius
R = 3 cm. If distance of source from the plate is
a = 39 cm and reflection coefficient of mirror plate is
= 0.70, calculate force exerted by light rays on the plate.

Sol. When light rays are incident on the mirror plate, a
part of then is reflected and a part is absorbed by the
plate. Therefore, momentum of light rays changes.
Due to change in the momentum, a force is
experienced by the plate. Magnitude of the force is
equal to rate of change of momentum. To calculate
rate of change of momentum, first we have to
consider a circular ring coplanar and co-axial with
the plate. Let the radius of that ring be x and radial
thickness dx as shown figure

Source

a

Distance of every point of this ring from the source
is
r =
2 2
x a + .
Hence, intensity of light incident on the ring is
I =
2
r 4
P

Direction of incident rays is inclined at angle with
normal to the plane of ring. Therefore, power
incident on the ring, p = (2xdx)I cos
or p =
2
r 2
dx x cos P

Since, incident power is in the form of light rays
which are incident at angle with normal to the
plate, therefore, net rate of incidence of momentum
on the ring considered
=
c
cos P
=
c r 2
dx x cos P
2
2

Since, 70% of the rays are reflected and 30% are
absorbed by the plate, therefore, rate of change of
momentum from the ring considered

=
c
1
[(0.7 p cos ) 2 + (0.3 p cos )]
But it is equal to force dF on the ring.
dF = 0.85
2 2 2
2
) x a ( c
dx x Pa
+

or Total force on the plate,
F =
=
=
+
R x
0 x
2 2 2
2
) x a (
dx x
c
Pa 85 . 0

=
(
(
+ ) R a (
1
a
1
c 2
Pa 85 . 0
2 2 2
2

=
c ) R a ( 2
PR 85 . 0
2 2
2
+
= 1 10
10
N Ans.

NUCLEAR REACTOR TYPES ARE THEY REALLY SAFE?
The nuclear power industry along with the reactor technology has been constantly developing for more than five
decades now. Nuclear reactors can be classified based on their nuclear reaction, the moderator material used,
generation of the reactor, fuel phase, fuel type, coolant used, etc. The fission nuclear reactors are mostly dealt with
because the fusion reactors are still in the developing stages and the fission reactors are already being used for the past
six decades.

Based on nuclear reaction
This type refers to the thermal (slow) reactors and the fast reactors based on the speed of neutrons. Thermal
reactors are the most affordable and common as they use the natural and raw uranium; and the neutrons are
decelerated from their natural speed when emitted from the broken atomic nuclei, and uses a moderating material
in the process. The Fast reactors are very expensive that require more enriched fuel.
Based on moderator material
Thermal reactors (because of the presence of the moderating material), and Graphite, Normal water and Heavy
water are also used as moderators. The moderating materials in the Graphite and the Heavy water reactors
thermalize the neutrons and keep the natural uranium intact without any enrichment.
Based on generation
Generation I reactors were the first prototype reactors, Generation II used standard designs till 50s, Generation III
were more modern, lightweighted, more efficient and were used till late 90s, the latest i.e. Generation IV reactors
targeting on economical and minimal waste, are still in the research and development stage which may officially
work until late 2020s.
Based on fuel phase and fuel type
It is Solid, Liquid or Gas reactor where Solid is most typical. The fuel type reactors also come with fuel phase-
uranium or thorium, which are available in abundant quantities on the land.

Matter Waves :
Planck's quantum theory : Wave-particle duality -
Planck gave quantum theory while explaining the
radiation spectrum of a black body. According to
Planck's theory, energy is always exchanged in
integral multiples of a quanta of light or photon.
Each photon has an energy E that depends only
on the frequency of electromagnetic radiation
and is given by :
E = h .....(1)
where h = 6.6 10
34
joule-sec, is Planck's
constant. In any interaction, the photon either
gives up all of its energy or none of it.
From Einstein's mass-energy equivalence
principle, we have
E = mc
2
.....(2)
Using equations (1) and (2), we get ;
mc
2
= h or m =
2
c
h
.....(3)
where m represents the mass of a photon in
motion. The velocity v of a photon is equal to
that of light, i.e., v = c.
According to theory of relativity, the rest mass m
0

of a photon is given by :
m
0
=
2
2
c
v
1 m
Here, m =
2
c
h
and v = c
Hence, m
0
= 0 ....(4)
i.e., rest mass of photon is zero, i.e., energy of
photon is totally kinetic.

The momentum p of each photon is given by :
p = mc =
2
c
h
c =
c
h
=
/ c
h
=
h
......(5)
The left hand side of the above equation involves
the particle aspect of photons (momentum) while
the right hand side involves the wave aspect
(wavelength) and the Planck's constant is the
bridge between the two sides. This shows that
electromagnetic radiation exhibits a wave-
particle duality. In certain circumstances, it
behaves like a wave, while in other circumstances
it behaves like a particle.
The wave-particle is not the sole monopoly of
e.m. waves. Even a material particle in motion
according to de Broglie will have a wavelength.
The de Broglie wavelength of the matter waves
is also given by :
=
mv
h
=
p
h
=
mK
h
2

where K is the kinetic energy of the particle.
If a particle of mass m kg and charge q coulomb
is accelerated from rest through a potential
difference of V volt. Then

2
1
mv
2
= qV or mv = mqV 2
Hence, =
mqV
h
2
=
V
34 . 12

Photoelectric effect :
When light of suitable frequency (electromagnetic
radiation) is allowed to fall on a metal surface,
electrons are emitted from the surface. These
electrons are known as photoelectrons and the effect
is known as photoelectric effect. Photoelectric
effect, light energy is converted into electrical
energy.
Laws of photolectric effect :
The kinetic energy of the emitted electron is
independent of intensity of incident radiation.
But the photoelectric current increases with the
increase of intensity of incident radiation.
The kinetic energy of the emitted electron
depends on the frequency of the incident
radiation. It increases with the increase of
frequency of incident radiation.
If the frequency of the incident radiation is less
than a certain value, then photoelectric emission
is not possible. This frequency is known as
threshold frequency. This threshold frequency
varies from emitter to emitter, i.e., depends on
the material.
There is no time lag between the arrival of light
and the emission of photoelectrons, i.e., it is an
instantaneous phenomenon.
Matter Waves, Photo-electric Effect
PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR IIT-JEE
KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
Failure of wave theory :
Wave theory of light could not explain the laws of
photoelectric effect.
According to wave theory, the kinetic energy of
the emitted electrons should increase with the
increase of intensity of incident radiation.
Kinetic energy of the emitted electron does not
depend on the frequency of incident radiation
according to wave theory.
Wave theory failed to explain the existence of
threshold frequency.
According to wave theory there must be a time
lag between the arrival of light and emission of
photoelectrons.
Einstein's theory of photoelectric effect :
Einstein explained the laws of photoelectric effect
on the basis of Planck's quantum theory of
radiation.
Einstein treated photoelectric effect as a collision
between a photon and an atom in which photon is
absorbed by the atom and an electron is emitted.
According to law of conservation of energy,
h = h
0
+
2
1
mv
2

where h is the energy of the incident photon; hv
0

is the minimum energy required to detach the
electron from the atom (work function or
ionisation energy) and (1/2) mv
2
is the kinetic
energy of the emitted electron.
The above equation is known as Einstein's
photoelectric equation. Kinetic energy of the
emitted electron,
=
2
1
mv
2
= h(
0
) = h W
Explanation of laws of photoelectric effect :
(a) The KE of the emitted electron increases with the
increase of frequency of incident radiation since
W (work function) is constant for a given emitter.
KE is directly proportional to (
0
)
(b) Keeping the frequency of incident radiation
constant if the intensity of incident light is
increased, more photons collide with more atoms
and more photoelectrons are emitted. The KE of
the emitted electron remains constant since the
same photon collides with the same atom (i.e., the
nature of the collision does not change). With the
increase in the intensity of incident light
photoelectric current increases.
(c) According to Einstein's equation, if the frequency
of incident radiation is less than certain minimum
value, the photoelectric emission is not possible.
This frequency is known as threshold frequency.
Hence, the frequency of incident radiation below
which photoelectric emission is not possible is
known as threshold frequency or cut-off
frequency. It is given by :

0
=
h
mv ) 2 / 1 ( h
2

On the other hand, if the wavelength of the
incident radiation is more than certain critical
value, then photoelectric emission is not possible.
This wavelength is known as threshold
wavelength of cut-off wavelength. It is given by :

0
=
] mv ) 2 / 1 ( h [
hc
2

(d) Since Einstein treated photoelectric effect as a
collision between a photon and an atom, he
explained the instantaneous nature of
Some other important points :
Stopping potential : The negative potential
applied to the collector in order to prevent the
electron from reaching the collector (i.e., to
reduce the photoelectric current to zero) is known
as stopping potential.
eV
0
=
2
. max
mv
2
1
= h W = h(
0
)
Millikan measured K.E. of emitted electrons or
stopping potentials for different frequencies of
incident radiation for a given emitter. He plotted a
graph with the frequency on x-axis and stopping
potential on y-axis. The graph so obtained was a
straight line as shown in figure.

0
Frequency of incident light
V
0
(
s
t
o
p
p
i
n
g

p
o
t
e
n
t
i
a
l
)

Millikan measured the slope of the straight line
(=h/e) and calculated the value of Planck's constant.

I
Full intensity
75% intensity
50% intensity
25% intensity
V
0
+

Potential difference

The intercept of V
0
versus graph on frequency
axis is equal to threshold frequency (
0
). From
this, the work function (h
0
) can be calculated.
Graphs in photoelectric effect :
(a) Photoelectric current versus potential difference
graphs for varying intensity (keeping same metal
plate and same frequency of incident light) :
These graphs indicate that stopping potential is
independent of the intensity and saturation current
is directly proportional to the intensity of light.
I
(V
0
)
1
+

Potential difference
(V
0
)
2
2
>
1

(b) Photoelectric current versus potential difference
graphs for varying frequency (keeping same
metal plate and same intensity of incident light) :
These graphs indicate that the stopping potential
is constant for a given frequency. The stopping
potential increases with increase of frequency.
The KE of the emitted electrons is proportional to
the frequency of incident light.

A1 A2 A3
0
B
1
B
2
B
3
Frequency

S
t
o
p
p
i
n
g

p
o
t
e
n
t
i
a
l

(c) Stopping potential versus frequency graphs for
different metals : These graphs indicate that the
stops is same for all metal, since they are parallel
straight lines. The slope is a universal constant
(=h/e). Further, the threshold frequency varies
with emitter since the intercepts on frequency axis
are different for different metals.

1. (i) A stopping potential of 0.82 V is required to stop
the emission of photoelectrons from the surface
of a metal by light of wavelength 4000 . For
light of wavelength 3000 , the stopping
potential is 1.85 V. Find the value of Planck's
constant.
(ii) At stopping potential, if the wavelength of the
incident light is kept at 4000 but the intensity
of light is increased two times, will photoelectric
current be obtained? Give reasons for your
answer.
Sol. (i) We have
1
hc
= eV
1
+ W
and
2
hc
= eV
2
+ W

|
|
.
|
\
|
1 2
1 1
hc = e(V
2
V
1
)
or h =
|
|
.
|
\
|
1 2
1 2
1 1
) (
e
V V e
=
|
|
.
|
\
|
7 7
8
19
10 4
1
10 3
1
10 3
) 82 . 0 85 . 1 ( 10 6 . 1

= 6.592 10
34
Js
(ii) No, because the stopping potential depends only
on the wavelength of light and not on its intensity.

2. A small plate of a metal (work function = 1.17 eV) is
plated at a distance of 2m from a monochromatic
light source of wavelength 4.8 10
7
m and power
1.0 watt. The light falls normally on the plate. Find
the number of photons striking the metal plate per
square metre per second. If a constant magnetic field
of strength 10
4
tesla is parallel to the metal surface,
find the radius of the largest circular path followed by
the emitted photoelectrons.
Sol. Energy of one photon =
hc
=
7
8 34
10 8 . 4
10 3 10 6 . 6

= 4.125 10
19
J
Number of photons emitted per second
=
19
10 125 . 4
0 . 1
= 2.424 10
18

Number of photons striking the plate per square
metre per second
=
2
18
) 2 ( 14 . 3 4
10 424 . 2

= 4.82 10
16

Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted
from the plate
E
max
=
hc
W
= 4.125 10
19
1.17 1.6 10
19

= 2.253 10
19
J
Solved Examples
3. A monochromatic light source of frequency
illuminates a metallic surface and ejects
photoelectrons. The photoelectrons having maximum
energy are just able to ionize the hydrogen atom in
ground state. When the whole experiment is repeated
with an incident radiation of frequency (5/6) , the
photoelectrons so emitted are able to excite the
hydrogen atom beam which then emits a radiation of
wavelength 1215 . Find the work function of the
metal and the frequency .
Sol. In the first case,
E
max
= Ionization energy = 13.6 eV
= 21.76 10
19
J
So, h = 21.76 10
19
J ....(1)
In the second case,
E'
max
=
hc

=
10
8 34
10 1215
10 3 10 6 . 6

=16.310
19
J
So,
6
5 h
= 16.3 10
19
+ W ...(2)
Dividing Eq.(1) by Eq.(2)

5
6
=
W 10 3 . 16
W 10 76 . 21
19
19
+
+

Solving, we get
W = 11.0 10 19 J = 6.875 eV
From Eq.(1) =
34
19 19
10 6 . 6
10 0 . 11 10 76 . 21
+

= 5 10
15
Hz
4. The radiation, emitted when an electron jumps from
n = 3 to n = 2 orbit in a hydrogen atom, falls on a
metal to produce photoelectrons. The electrons from
the metal surface with maximum kinetic energy are
made to move perpendicular to a magnetic field of
1/320 T in a radius of 10
3
m. Find (i) the kinetic
energy of electrons, (ii) wavelength of radiation and
(iii) the work function of metal.
Sol. (i) Speed of an electron in the magnetic field,
v =
m
Ber

Kinetic energy of electrons
E
max
=
2
1
mv
2
=
m
r e B
2
2 2 2

=
2
320
1
|
.
|
\
|

31
2 3 2 19
10 1 . 9 2
) 10 ( ) 10 6 . 1 (

= 1.374 10
19
J
= 0.8588 eV
(ii) Energy of the photon emitted from a hydrogen
atom
h =
hc
=
(
2 2
3
1
2
1

= 1.888 eV
Wavelength of radiation,
=
19
8 34
10 6 . 1 888 . 1
10 3 10 62 . 6

= 6.572 10
7
m
= 6572
(iii) Work function of metal W = h E
max

= 1.8888 0.8588
= 1.03 eV

5. X-rays are produced in an X-ray tube by electrons
accelerated through a potential difference of 50.0 kV.
An electron makes three collisions in the target
before coming to rest and loses half of its kinetic
energy in each of the first two collisions. Determine
the wavelengths of the resulting photons. Neglect the
recoil of the heavy target atoms.
Sol. Initial kinetic energy of the electron = 50.0 keV
Kinetic energy after first collision = 25.0 keV
Energy of the photon produced in the first collision,
E
1
= 50.0 25.0 = 25.0 keV
Wavelength of this photon

1
=
1
E
hc
=
3 19
8 34
10 0 . 25 10 6 . 1
10 3 10 6 . 6

= 0.495 10
10
m = 0.495
Kinetic energy of the electron after second collision
= 12.5 eV
Energy of the photon produced in the second
collision, E
2
= 25.0 12.5 = 12.5 keV
Wavelength of this photon

2
=
2
E
hc
=
3 19
8 34
10 5 . 12 10 6 . 1
10 3 10 6 . 6

= 0.99 10
10
m
= 0.99
Kinetic energy of the electron after third collision = 0
Energy of the photon produced in the third collision,
E
3
= 12.5 0 = 12.5 keV
This is same as E
2
. Therefore, wavelength of this
photon,
3
=
2
= 0.99 .


Thermal Expansion :
.(a) When the temperature of a substance is increased,
it expands. The heat energy which is supplied to
the substance is gained by the constituent
particles of the substance as its kinetic energy.
Because of this the collisions between the
constituents particles are accompanied with
greater force which increase the distance between
the constituent particles.
l = lT ; A = AT ; V = VT
or l' = l (1 + T) ; A' = A(1 + T) ;
V' = V(1 + T)
(b) Also = '(1 + T) where ' is the density at
higher temperature clearly ' < for substances
which have positive value of
* = 2 and = 3
Water has negative value of for certain temperature
range (0 to 4C). This means that for that
temperature range the volume decreases with
increase in temperature. In other words the density
increases with increase in temperature.

0 ml
5 ml
10 ml
15 ml
20 ml
25 ml
30 ml

If a liquid is kept in a container and the temperature
of the system is increased then the volume of the
liquid as well as the container increases. The
apparent change in volume of the liquid as shown by
the scale is
V
app
= V( 3) T
Where V is the volume of liquid at lower temperature
V
app
is the apparent change in volume
is the coefficient of cubical expansion of liquid
is the coefficients of linear expansion of the
container.
Loss or gain in time by a pendulum clock with
change in temperature is t =
2
1
(T) t
Where t is the loss or gain in time in a time interval t
T is change in temperature and d is coefficient of
linear expansion.
If a rod is heated or cooled but not allowed to expand
or contract then the thermal stresses developed
A
F
= T.
If a scale is calibrated at a temperature T
1
but used at
a temperature T
2
, then the observed reading will be
wrong. In this case the actual reading is given by
R = R
0
(1 + T)
Where R
0
is the observed reading, R is the actual
reading.
For difference between two rods to the same at all
temperatures l
1
1
= l
2
2
.
Thermodynamics
According to first law of thermodynamics
q = U + W
For an isothermal process (for a gaseous system)
(a) The pressure volume relationship is V = constt.
(b) U = 0
(c) q = W
(d) W = 2.303 nRT log
10

i
f
V
V
= 2.303 nRT log
10

f
i
p
p

(e) Graphs T
2
> T
1

T
2
T
1
P
V

P
T
V
T

These lines are called isotherms (parameters at
constant temperature)
For an adiabatic process (for a gaseous system)
(a) The pressure-volume relationship is PV
= constt.
(b) The pressure-volume-temperature relationship is
T
PV
= constt.
(c) From (a) and (b) TV
I
= constt.
(d) q = 0
(e) W = U
Thermal Expansion, Thermodynamics

PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR IIT-JEE
KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
(f) U = nc
v
T where c
v
=
1
R

(g) W =
1
f f i i
V p V p
=
1
) (

f i
T T nR

(h) Graphs

V
P

P
T
V
T

Please note that P-V graph line (isotherm) is
steeper.
For isochoric process
(a) P T
(b) W = 0
(c) q = U
(d) U = nC
v
T where C
v
=
1
R

(e) Graphs

P
V

P
T
V
T

For isobaric process
(a) V T
(b) W = PV = P(V
f
V
i
) = nR(T
f
T
i
)
(c) U = nC
v
T
(d) q = nC
p
T
(e) Graphs

P
V

P
T
V
T

For a cyclic process
(a) U = 0 q = W
(b) Work done is the area enclosed in p-V graph.
For any process depicted by P-V diagram, area under
the graph represents the word done.
Kirchoff's law states that good absorbers are good
emitters also.
Problem solving Strategy : Thermal Expansion
Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts: Decide
whether the problem involves changes in length
(linear thermal expansion) or in volume (volume
thermal expansion)
Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps:
Eq. L = L
0
T for linear expansion and
Eq. V = V
0
T for volume expansion.
Identify which quantities in Eq. L = L
0
T or
V = V
0
T are known and which are the
unknown target variables.
Step 3: Execute the solution as follows:
Solve for the target variables. Often you will be
given two temperatures and asked to compute T.
Or you may be given an initial temperature T
0
and
asked to find a final temperature corresponding to
a given length or volume change. In this case,
plan to find T first; then the final temperature is
T
0
+ T.
Unit consistency is crucial, as always. L
0
and L
(or V
0
V) must have the same units, and if you
use a value or or in K
1
or (C)
1
, then T
must be in kelvins or Celsius degrees (C). But
you can use K and C interchangeably.
Step 4: Evaluate your answer: Check whether your
results make sense. Remember that the sizes of holes
in a material expand with temperature just as the
same way as any other linear dimension, and the
volume of a hole (such as the volume of a container)
expands the same way as the corresponding solid
shape.
Problem solving strategy : Thermodynamics I
st
Law
Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts : The first law
of thermodynamics is the statement of the law of
conservation of energy in its most general form. You
can apply it to any situation in which you are
concerned with changes in the internal energy of a
system, with heat flow into or out of a system, and/or
with work done by or on a system.
Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps
Carefully define what the thermodynamics system is.
The first law of thermodynamics focuses on
systems that go through thermodynamic
processes. Some problems involve processes
with more than one step. so make sure that you
identify the initial and final state for each step.
Identify the known quantities and the target
variables.
Check whether you have enough equations. The
first law, U = Q W, can be applied just once to
each step in a thermodynamic process, so you will
often need additional equations. These often
include Eq.
=
2
1
V
V
dV p W for the work done in a
volume change and the equation of state of the
material that makes up the thermodynamic system
(for an ideal gas, pV = nRT).
Step 3: Execute the solution as follows :
You shouldn't be surprised to be told that
consistent units are essential. If p is a Pa and V in
m
3
, then W is in joules. Otherwise, you may want
to convert the pressure and volume units into
units of Pa and m
3
. If a heat capacity is given in
terms of calories, usually the simplest procedure
is to convert it to joules. Be especially careful
with moles. When you use n = m
tot
/M to convert
between total mass and number of moles,
remember that if m
tot
is in kilograms, M must be
in kilograms per mole. The usual units for M are
grams per mole; be careful !
The internal energy change U in any
thermodynamic process or series of processes in
independent of the path, whether the substance is
an ideal gas or not. This point is of the utmost
importance in the problems in this topic.
Sometimes you will be given enough information
about one path between the given initial and final
states to calculate U for that path. Since U is
the same for every possible path between the
same two states, you can then relate the various
energy quantities for other paths.
When a process consists of several distinct steps,
it often helps to make a chart showing Q, W, and
U for each step. Put these quantities for each
step on a different line, and arrange them so the
Q's, W's, and U's form columns. Then you can
apply the first law to each line ; in addition, you
can add each column and apply the first law to the
sums. Do you see why ?
Using above steps, solve for the target variables.
Step 4: Evaluate your answer : Check your results for
reasonableness. In particular, make sure that each of
your answers has the correct algebraic sign.
Remember that a positive Q means that heat flows
into the system, and that a negative Q means that heat
flows into the system, and that a negative Q means
that heat flows out of the system. A positive W
means that work is done by the system on its
environment, while a negative W means that work is
done on the system by its environment.

1. A metallic bob weighs 50 g in air. It it is immersed
in a liquid at a temperature of 25C, it weighs 45 g.
When the temperature of the liquid is raised to 100C,
it weighs 45.1 g. Calculate the coefficient of cubical
expansion of the liquid given that the coefficient of
linear expansion of the metal is 2 10
6
(C)
1
.
Sol. Loss in weight in liquid at 25C = (50 45) = 5 gm
Weight of liquid displaced at 25C = V
25
25
g
5 = V
25
25
g ...(1)
Similarly, V
100
100
g = 50 45.1 = 4.9 gm ...(2)
From eq.(1) & (2) we get,

9 . 4
5
=
100
25
100
25
.
V
V

Now, V
100
= V
25
(1 +
metal
75)= V
25
(1 + 3
metal
75)
= V
25
(1 + 3 12 10
6
75)
or V
100
= V
25
(1 + 0.0027) = V
25
1.0027
Also,
25
=
100
(1 + 75)
where, = Required coefficient of expansion of the liquid

9 . 4
5
=
100
100
25
25
) 75 1 (
0027 . 1
+
V
V
=
0027 . 1
75 1 +

or = 3.1 10
4
(C)
1

2. A one litre flask contains some mercury. It is found
that at different temperature the volume of air inside
the flask remains the same. What is the volume of
mercury in flask ? Given that the coefficient of linear
expansion of glass = 9 10
6
(C)
1
and coefficient of
volume expansion of mercury = 1.8 10
4
(C
1
).
Sol. Let V = Volume of the vessel
V' = Volume of mercury
For unoccupied volume to remain constant increase
in volume of mercury should be equal to increase in
volume of vessel.
V'
m
T = V
g
T or V' =
m
g
V

V' =
4
6
10 8 . 1
10 27 1000

= 150 cm
3

3. A clock with a metallic pendulum gains 6 seconds
each day when the temperature is 20C and loses 12
seconds each day when the temperature is 40C. Find
the coefficient of linear expansion of the metal.
Sol. Time taken for one oscillation of the pendulum is
T =
g
L
2 or T
2
= 4
2

g
L
.....(1)
Partially differentiating, we get
2Tt = 4
2

g
L
.....(2)
Dividing (2) by (1), we get

T
T
=
L
L
2
=
L
t L
2

= t
2
1

where t is the change in temperature. Now,
One day = 24 hours = 86400 sec
Let t be the temperature at which the clock keeps
correct time.
At 20C, the gain in time is
6 =
2
1
(t 20) 86400 ....(3)
At 40C, the loss in time is
12 =
2
1
(40 t) 86400 ...(4)
Dividing (4) by (3), we have

6
12
=
20
40
t
t

which gives t =
3
80
C.
Using the value in equation(3), we have
6 =
2
1
|
.
|
\
|
20
3
80
86400
which gives = 2.1 10
5
perC

Solved Examples
4. A piston can freely move inside a horizontal cylinder
closed from both ends. Initially, the piston separates
the inside space of the cylinder into two equal parts
each of volume V
0
, in which an ideal gas is contained
under the same pressure p
0
and at the same
temperature. What work has to be performed in order
to increase isothermally the volume of one part of gas
times compared to that of the other by slowly
moving the piston ?
Sol. Let volume of chambers changes by V. According
to the problem, the final volume of left chamber is
times final volume of right chamber.
V
0
+ V = (V
0
V)
or V =
0
1
1
V
|
|
.
|
\
|
+

P
0
,v
0
,T
0

P
0
,v
0
,T
0

As piston is moved slowly therefore, change in
kinetic energy is zero. By work-energy theorem, we
can write
W
gas in right chamber
+ W
gas in left chamber
+
ext
Agent
W = KE

ext
Agent
W = (W
gas(R)
+ W
gas(L)
)
We know that in isothermal process, work done is
given by
W = nRT ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
i
f
V
V

Work done by gas in left chamber (W
L
)
= P
0
V
0
ln
|
|
.
|
\
| +
0
0
V
V V
= P
0
V
0
ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
1
2

Similarly, work done by gas in right chamber (W
R
)
= P
0
V
0
ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
0
0
V
V V
= P
0
V
0
ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
1
2

ext
Agent
W = P
0
V
0
ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
1
2
P
0
V
0
ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
1
2

= P
0
V
0
ln
2
4
1
|
|
.
|
\
|
+

5. A smooth vertical tube having two different sections
is open from both ends equipped with two pistons of
different areas figure. Each piston slides within a
respective tube section. One mole of ideal gas is
enclosed between the pistons tied with a non-
stretchable thread. The cross-sectional area of the
upper piston is S greater than that of the lower one.
The combined mass of the two pistons is equal to m.
The outside air pressure is P
0
. By how many kelvins
must the gas between the pistons be heated to shift
the pistons through l.

P
0
P
0

Sol. Let A
1
= Cross section of upper piston
A
2
= Cross section of lower piston
T = Tension in the string
P = Gas pressure
m
1
= Mass of upper piston
m
2
= Mass of lower piston
Now, consider FBD of upper piston

PA
1

m
1
g
P
0
A
1

From equilibrium consideration of upper piston
we get, P
0
A
1
+ T + m
1
g = PA
1

Similarly, consider FBD of lower piston

PA
2

m
2
g P
0
A
2

T

P
0
A
2
+ T = m
2
g + PA
2

Eliminating T, we get
P = P
0
+
2 1
2 1
) (
A A
g m m
+

According to problem
m = m
1
+ m
2

and S = A
1
A
2

P = P
0
+
S
mg

Now, PV = RT
or PV = RT or T =
R
V P

But V = (A
1
A
2
)l = S. l
T = |
.
|
\
|
+
S
mg
P
0
S.l

l l
l


Reduction of Aldehydes and Ketones by Hydride
Transfer :

H
3
B H + C = O
R
R
H C O
R
R

H C O H
R
R
H OH
+

Hydride transfer Alkoxide ion Alcohol

These steps are repeated until all hydrogen atoms
attached to boron have been transferred.
Sodium borohydride is a less powerful reducing
agent than lithium aluminum hydride. Lithium
aluminum hydride reduces acids, aldehydes, and
ketones but sodium borohydride reduces only
aldehydes and ketones :

O
C
O R
O
C
OR R
O
C
R R
O
C
H R
<
<
<
Reduced by LiAlH
4
Reduced by NaBH
4
Ease of reduction

Lithium aluminum hydride reacts violently with
water, and therefore reductions with lithium
aluminum hydride must be carried out in anhydrous
solutions, usually in anhydrous ether. (Ethyl acetate
is added cautiously after the reaction is over to
decompose excess LiAlH
4
; then water is added to
decompose the aluminum complex.) Sodium
borohydride reductions, by contrast, can be carried
out in water or alcohol solutions.
The Addition of Ylides : The Wittig reaction :
Aldehydes and ketones react with phosphorus ylides
to yield alkenes and triphenylphosphine oxide. (An
ylide is a neutral molecule having a negative carbon
adjacent to a positive heteroatom.) Phosphorus ylides
are also called phosphoranes :

C = O + (C
6
H
5
)
3
P C
R
R
.. + R
R
C = C
R
R
R
R
+ O =P(C
6
H
5
)
3
Aldehyde or
ketone
Phosphorus ylide
or phosphorane
Alkene
[(E) and(Z) isomers]
Triphenyl phosphine
oxide

This reaction, known as the Wittig reaction, has
proved to be a valuable method for synthesizing
alkenes. The Wittig reaction is applicable to a wide
variety of compounds, and although a mixture of (E)
and (Z) isomers may result, the Wittig reaction offers
a great advantage over most other alkene syntheses in
that no ambiguity exists as to the location of the
double bond in the product. (This is in contrast to E1
eliminations, which may yield multiple alkene
products by rearrangement to more stable carbocation
intermediates, and both E1 and E2 elimination
reactions, which may produce multiple products
when different hydrogens are available for
removal.)
Phosphorus ylides are easily prepared from
triphenylphosphine and primary or secondary alkyl
halides. Their preparation involves two reactions :
General Reaction
Reaction 1

(C
6
H
5
)
3
P : + CH X (C
6
H
5
)
3
P CH X

R

R

+

Triphenylphosphine
R

R

An alkyltriphenylphosphonium
halide

Reaction 2

(C
6
H
5
)
3
P C H : B
(C
6
H
5
)
3
P C :
+ H:B

R

R

+
R

R

A phosphorus ylide

+

Specific Example
Reaction 1

(C
6
H
5
)
3
P : + CH
3
Br (C
6
H
5
)
3
P CH
3
Br
C6H6
+
Methyltriphenylphosphonium
bromide (89%)

Reaction 2
Organic
Chemistry
Fundamentals

CARBONYL COMPOUND
KEY CONCEPT

(C
6
H
5
)
3
P CH
3
+ C
6
H
5
Li
(C
6
H
5
)
3
P CH
2
:
+ C
6
H
6
+ LiBr
+
+
Br

The first reaction is a nucleophilic substitution
reaction. Triphenylphosphine is an excellent
nucleophile and a weak base. It reacts readily with 1
and 2 alkyl halide by an S
N
2 mechanism to displace
a halide ion from the alkyl halide to give an
alkyltriphenylphosphonium salt. The second reaction
is an acid-base reaction. A strong base (usually an
alkyllithium or phenyllithium) removes a proton from
the carbon that is attached to phosphorus to give the
ylide.
Phosphorus ylides can be represented as a hybrid of
the two resonance structures shown here. Quantum
mechanical calculations indicate that the contribution
made by the first structure is relatively unimportant.

(C
6
H
5
)
3
P = C
R
R
(C
6
H
5
)
3
P C :
R
R
+

The mechanism of the Wittig reaction has been the
subject of considerable study. An early mechanistic
proposal suggested that the ylide, acting as a
carbanion, attacks the carbonyl carbon of the
aldehyde or ketone to form an unstable intermediate
with separated charges called a betaine. In the next
step, the betaine is envisioned as becoming an
unstable four-membered cyclic system called an
oxaphosphetane, which then spontaneously loses
triphenylphosphine oxide to become an alkene.
However, studies by E. Vedejs and others suggest
that the betaine is not an intermediate and that the
oxaphosphetane is formed directly by a cycloaddition
reaction. The driving force for the Wittig reaction is
the formation of the very strong (H = 540 kJ mol
1
)
phosphorus oxygen bond in triphenylphosphine
oxide.

RC +
:CR R C C R
R
:O:
R
P(C
6
H
5
)
3
..
+
R C C R
R
:O
R
P(C
6
H
5
)
3
..
Aldehyde
or ketone
R R
P(C
6
H
5
)
3

+
:O:
Ylide Betaine
(may not be formed)
Oxaphosphetane
C = C + O = P(C
6
H
5
)3
R

R

R

R

Alkene
(+diastereomer)
Triphenylphosphine
oxide

Specific Example :

O + :CH
2
P(C
6
H
5
)
3
CH
2
O P(C
6
H
5
)
3
+
CH
2
O P(C
6
H
5
)
3
CH
2
+ O=P(C
6
H
5
)
3
Methylenecyclohexane
(86%)

+

Michael Additions :
Conjugate additions of enolate anions to
--unsaturated carbonyl compound are known
generally as Michael additions. An example is the
addition of cyclohexanone to C
6
H
5
CH=CHCOC
6
H
5
:

O O
O
C6H5CH=CHCC6H5
O
O
CH
C
6
H
5
CH
CO
C
6
H
5
O
CH
C
6
H
5
C
C = O
C
6
H
5
H
H
+H
3
O
+
OH

The sequence that follows illustrates how a conjugate
aldol addition (Michael addition) followed by a
simple aldol condensation may be used to build one
ring onto another. This procedure is known as the
Robinson anulation (ring-forming) reaction (after the
English chemist, Sir Robert Robinon, who won the
Nobel Prize in chemistry in 1947 for his research on
naturally occurring compounds) :

O
+ CH
2
= CHCCH
3

O
CH
2
CH
3
CH
2
C
H
3
C
O
2-Methylcyclo-
hexane-1, 3-dione
CH
3
O
O
O
O
CH
3
O
(65%)
OH

CH3OH
(conjugate
addition)
Methyl vinyl
ketone

aldol
condensation
base
(H2O)

Inorganic
Chemistry
Fundamentals

Tetragonal distortion of octahedral complexes (Jahn-
Teller distortion) :
The shape of transition metal complexes are affected
by whether the d orbitals are symmetrically or
asymmetrically filled.
Repulsion by six ligands in an octahedral complex
splits the d orbitals on the central metal into t
2g
and e
g
levels. It follows that there is a corresponding
repulsion between the d electrons and the ligands. If
the d electrons are symmetrically arranged, they will
repel all six ligands equally. Thus the structure will
be a completely regular octahedron. The symmetrical
arrangements of d electrons are shown in Table.
Symmetrical electronic arrangements :

Electronic
configurat
ion
t
2g
e
g
d
5

d
6

d
8

d
10

All other arrangements have an asymmetrical
arrangement of d electrons. If the d electrons are
asymmetrically arranged, they will repel some
ligands in the complex more than others. Thus the
structure is distorted because some ligands are
prevented from approaching the metal.
as closely as others. The e
g
orbitals point directly at
the ligands. Thus asymmetric filling of the e
g
orbitals
in some ligands being repelled more than others. This
causes a significant distortion of the octahedral
shape. In contrast the t
2g
orbitals do not point directly
at the ligands, but point in between the ligand
directions. Thus asymmetric filling of the t
2g
orbitals
has only a very small effect on the stereochemistry.
Distortion caused by asymmetric filling of the t
2g

orbitals is usually too small to measure. The
electronic arrangements which will produce a large
distortion are shown in Table.
The two e
g
orbitals 2 2
y x
d
and
2
z
d are normally
degenerate. However, if they are asymmetrically
filled then this degeneracy is destroyed, and the two
orbitals are no longer equal in energy. If the
2
z
d
orbital contains one.
Asymmetrical electronic arrangements :

Electronic
configurati
on
t
2g
e
g
d
4

d
7

d
9

more electron than the 2 2
y x
d
orbital then the ligands

approaching along +z and z will encounter greater
repulsion than the other four ligands. The repulsion
and distortion result in elongation of the octahedron
along the z axis. This is called tetragonal distortion.
Strictly it should be called tetragonal elongation. This
form of distortion is commonly obsered.
If the 2 2
y x
d
orbital contains the extra electron, then

elongation will occur along the x and y axes. This
means that the ligands approach more closely along
the z-axis. Thus there will be four long bonds and
two short bonds. This is equivalent to compressing
the octahedron along the z axis, and is called
tetragonal compression, and it is not possible to
predict which will occur.
For example, the crystal structure of CrF
2
is a
distorted rutile (TiO
2
) structure. Cr
2+
is octahedrally
surrounded by six F
, and there are four CrF bonds

of length 1.98 2.01 , and two longer bonds of
length 2.43 . The octahedron is said to be
tetragonally distorted. The electronic arrangement in
Cr
2+
is d
4
. F
is a weak field ligand, and so the t

2g

level contains three electrons and the e
g
level contains
one electron. The 2 2
y x
d
orbital has four lobes whilst

the
2
z
d orbital has only two lobes pointing at the
ligands. To minimize repulsion with the ligands, the
single e
g
electron will occupy the
2
z
d orbital. This is
equivalent to splitting the degeneracy of the e
g
level
so that
2
z
d is of lower energy, i.e. more stable, and
2 2
y x
d
is of higher energy, i.e. less stable. Thus the

CO-ORDINATION COMPOUND
& METALLURGY
KEY CONCEPT
two ligands approaching along the +z and z
directions are subjected to greater repulsion than the
four ligands along +x, x, +y and y. This causes
tetragonal distortion with four short bonds and two
long bonds. In the same way MnF
3
contains Mn
3+

with a d
4
configuration, and forms a tetragonally
distorted octahedral structure.
Many Cu(+II) salts and complexes also show
tetragonally distorted octahedral structures. Cu
2+
has
a d
9
configuration :

t
2g

e
g

To minimize repulsion with the ligands, two
electrons occupy the
2
z
d orbital and one electron
occupies the 2 2
y x
d
orbital. Thus the two ligands

along z and z are repelled more strongly than are
the other four ligands.
The examples above show that whenever the 2
z
d and
2 2
y x
d
orbitals are unequally occupied, distortion

occurs. This is know as JahnTeller distortion.
Leaching :
It involves the treatment of the ore with a suitable
reagents as to make it soluble while impurities
remain insoluble. The ore is recovered from the
solution by suitable chemical method. For example,
bauxite ore contains ferric oxide, titanium oxide and
silica as impurities. When the powdered ore is
digested with an aqueous solution of sodium
hydroxide at about 150C under pressure, the alumina
(Al
2
O
3
) dissolves forming soluble sodium meta-
aluminate while ferric oxide (Fe
2
O
3
), TiO
2
and silica
remain as insoluble part.
Al
2
O
3
+ 2NaOH 2NaAlO
2
+ H
2
O
Pure alumina is recovered from the filtrate
NaAlO
2
+ 2H
2
O Al(OH)
3
+ NaOH
2Al(OH)
3

) autoclave (
Ignited
Al
2
O
3
+ 3H
2
O
Gold and silver are also extracted from their native
ores by Leaching (Mac-Arthur Forrest cyanide
process). Both silver and gold particles dissolve in
dilute solution of sodium cyanide in presence of
oxygen of the air forming complex cyanides.
4Ag + 8NaCN + 2H
2
O + O
2

4NaAg(CN)
2
+ 4NaOH
Sod. argentocyanide
4Au + 8NaCN + 2H
2
O + O
2

4NaAu(CN)
2
+ 4NaOH
Sod. aurocyanide
Ag or Au is recovered from the solution by the
addition of electropositive metal like zinc.
2NaAg(CN)
2
+ Zn Na
2
Zn(CN)
4
+ 2Ag
2NaAu(CN)
2
+ Zn Na
2
Zn(CN)
4
+ 2Au
Soluble complex
Special Methods :
Mond's process : Nickel is purified by this method.
Impure nickel is treated with carbon monoxide at 60
80 C when volatile compound, nickel carbonyl, is
formed. Nickel carbonyl decomposes at 180C to
form pure nickel and carbon monoxide which can
again be used.

Impure nickel + CO
6080C
NI(CO)
4
Ni + 4CO
180C
Gaseous compound

Zone refining or Fractional crystallisation :
Elements such as Si, Ge, Ga, etc., which are used as
semiconductors are refined by this method. Highly
pure metals are obtained. The method is based on the
difference in solubility of impurities in molten and
solid state of the metal. A movable heater is fitted
around a rod of the impure metal. The heater is
slowly moved across the rod. The metal melts at the
point of heating and as the heater moves on from one
end of the rod to the other end, the pure metal
crystallises while the impurities pass on the adjacent
melted zone.

Molten zone
containing
impurity
Pure metal
Moving circular
heater
Impure
zone

Different metallurgical processes can be broadly
divided into three main types.
Pyrometallurgy : Extraction is done using heat
energy. The metals like Cu, Fe, Zn, Pb, Sn, Ni, Cr,
Hg, etc., which are found in nature in the form of
oxides, carbonates, sulphides are extracted by this
process.
Hydrometallurgy : Extraction of metals involving
aqueous solution is known as hydrometallurgy.
Silver, gold, etc., are extracted by this process.
Electrometallurgy : Extraction of highly reactive
metals such as Na, K, Ca, Mg, Al, etc., by carrying
electrolysis of one of the suitable compound in fused
or molten state.


1. It is possible to supercool water without freezing. 18
g of water are supercooled to 263.15 K(10C) in a
thermostat held at this temperature, and then
crystallization takes place.
Calculate
r
G for this process. Given:
C
p
(H
2
O,1) = 75.312 J K
1
mol
1
C
p
(H
2
O,s) = 36.400 J K
1
mol
1

fus
H (at 0C) = 6.008 kJ mol
1

Sol. The process of crystallization at 0C and at 101.325
kPa pressure is an equilibrium process, for which
G = 0. The crystallization of supercooled water is a
spontaneous phase transformation, for which G
must be less than zero. Its value for this process can
be calculated as shown below.
The given process
H
2
O(1, 10C) H
2
O(s, 10C)
is replaced by the following reversible steps.
(a) H
2
O(1, 10C) H
2
O(1, 0C) ...(1)

r
H
1
=
K 15 . 273
K 15 . 263
m , p
) 1 ( C dT
= (75.312 J K
1
mol
1
) (10 K)
= 753.12 J mol
1

r
S
1
=
K 15 . 273
K 15 . 263
m , p
R
) 1 ( C
dT
= (75.312 J K
1
mol
1
) ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
K 15 . 263
K 15 . 273

= 2.809 J K
1
mol
1

(b) H
2
O(1, 0C) H
2
O(s, 0C) ...(2)

r
H
2
= 6.008 kJ mol
1

r
S
2
=
) K 15 . 273 (
) mol J 6008 (
1
= 21.995 J K
1
mol
1

(c) H
2
O(s, 0C) H
2
O(s, 10C) ...(3)

r
H
3
=
K 15 . 263
K 15 . 273
m , p
) s ( C dT
= (36.400 J K
1
mol
1
)(10 K)
= 364.0 J mol
1

r
S
3
=
K 15 . 263
K 15 . 273
m , p
T
) s ( C
dT
= (36.400 J K
1
mol
1
) ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
K 15 . 273
K 15 . 263

= 1.358 J K
1
mol
1

The overall process is obtained by adding Eqs. (1),
(2) and (3), i.e.
H
2
O(1, 10C) H
2
O(s, 10C)
The total changes in
r
H and
r
S are given by

r
H =
r
H
1
+
r
H
2
+
r
H
3

=(753.12 6008 364.0) J mol
1

= 5618.88 J mol
1

r
S =
r
S
1
+
r
S
2
+
r
S
3

= (2.809 21.995 1.358) J K
1
mol
1

= 20.544 J K
1
mol
1

Now
r
G of this process is given by

r
G =
r
H T
r
S
= 5618.88 J mol
1
(263.15 K)( 20.544 J K
1
mol
1
)
= 212.726 J mol
1

2. From the standard potentials shown in the following
diagram, calculate the potentials
1
E and
2
E .

BrO
3
0.54 V
BrO
0.45 V
2
1
Br
2
1.07 V
Br
0.17 V
E
2
E
1

Sol. The reaction corresponding to the potential E
1
is
BrO
3
+ 3H
2
O + 5e
=
2
1
Br
2
+ 6OH

...(1)
This reaction can be obtained by adding the
following two reduction reactions:
BrO
3
+ 2H
2
O + 4e
= BrO
+ 4OH

...(2)
BrO
+ H
2
O + e
=
2
1
Br
2
+ 2OH

...(3)
Hence the free energy change of reaction (1) will be

) 1 ( reaction
G =
) 2 ( reaction
G +
) 3 ( reaction
G
Replacing Gs in terms of potentials, we get
5FE
1
= 4F(0.54 V) 1F (0.45 V)
= (2.61 V) F
UNDERSTANDING
Physical Chemistry
Hence E
1
=
5
V 61 . 2
= 0.52 V
Now the reaction corresponding to the potential E
2
is
BrO
3
+ 2H
2
O + 6e
= Br
+ 6OH

...(4)
This reaction can be obtained by adding the
following three reactions.
BrO
3
+ 2H
2
O + 4e
= BrO
+ 4OH

(Eq.2)
BrO
+ H
2
O + e
=
2
1
Br
2
+ 2OH
(Eq.3)

2
1
Br
2
+ e
= Br

...(5)
Hence

) 4 ( reaction
G =
) 2 ( reaction
G +
) 3 ( reaction
G
+
) 5 ( reaction
G
or 6F(E
2
) = 4F(0.54 V) 1F(0.45 V)
1F (1.07 V)
= ( 3.68 V) F
or E
2
=
6
68 . 3
= 0.61 V.

3. What is the solubility of AgCl in 0.20 M NH
3
?
Given : K
sp
(AgCl) = 1.7 10
10
M
2

K
1
= [Ag(NH
3
)
+
] / [Ag
+
] [NH
3
] = 2.33 10
3
M
1
and
K
2
= [Ag(NH
3
)
2
+
]/[Ag(NH
3
)
+
][NH
3
] = 7.14 10
3
M
1

Sol. If x be the concentration of AgCl in the solution, then
[Cl
] = x
From the K
sp
for AgCl, we derive
[Ag
+
] =
] Cl [
K
sp
=
x
M 10 7 . 1
2 10

If we assume that the majority of the dissolved Ag
+

goes into solution as Ag(NH
3
)
2
+
then [Ag(NH
3
)
2
+
] = x
Since two molecules of NH
3
are required for every
Ag(NH
3
)
2
+
ion formed, we have [NH
3
] = 0.20 M 2x
Therefore,
K
inst
=
] ) NH ( Ag [
] NH ][ Ag [
2 3
2
3
+
+
=
x
) x 2 M 20 . 0 (
x
M 10 7 . 1
2
2 10
|
|
.
|
\
|

= 6.0 10
8
M
2

From which we derive

2
2
x
) x 2 M 20 . 0 (
=
2 10
2 8
M 10 7 . 1
M 10 0 . 6
= 3.5 10
2

which gives x = [Ag(NH
3
)
2
+
] = 9.6 10
3
M, which
is the solubility of AgCl in 0.20 M NH
3

4. Potassium alum is KA1(SO
4
)
2
.12H
2
O. As a strong
electrolyte, it is considered to be 100% dissociated
into K
+
, Al
3+
, and SO
4
2
. The solution is acidic
because of the hydrolysis of Al
3+
, but not so acidic as
might be expected, because the SO
4
2
can sponge up
some of the H
3
O
+
by forming HSO
4
. Given a
solution made by dissolving 11.4 g of
KA1(SO
4
)
2
.12H
2
O in enough water to make 0.10 dm
3

of solution, calculate its [H
3
O
+
] :
(a) Considering the hydrolysis
Al
3+
+ 2H
2
O Al(OH)
2+
+ H
3
O
+

with K
h
= 1.4 10
5
M
(b) Allowing also for the equilibrium
HSO
4
+ H
2
O H
3
O
+
+ SO
4
2

with K
2
= 1.26 10
2
M
Sol. (a) Amount of alum =
1
mol g 38 . 474
g 4 . 11
= 0.024 mol
Molarity of the prepared solution =
3
dm 1 . 0
mol 024 . 0

= 0.24 M
Hydrolysis of Al
3+
is
Al
3+
+ 2H
2
O Al(OH)
2+
+ H
3
O
+

K
h
=
] Al [
] O H ][ ) OH ( Al [
3
3
2
+
+ +

If x is the concentration of Al
3+
that has hydrolyzed,
we have
K
h
=
x M 24 . 0
) x )( x (
= 1.4 10
5
M
Solving for x, we get
[H
3
O
+
] = x = 1.82 10
3
M
(b) We will have to consider the following equilibria.
Al
3+
+ 2H
2
O Al(OH)
2+
+ H
3
O
+

H
3
O
+
+ SO
4
2
HSO
4
+ H
2
O
Let z be the concentration of SO
4
2
that combines
with H
3
O
+
and y be the net concentration of H
3
O
+

that is present in the solution. Since the concentration
z of SO
4
2
combines with the concentration z of
H
3
O
+
, it is obvious that the net concentration of H
3
O
+

produced in the hydrolysis reaction of Al
3+
is (y + z).
Thus, the concentration (y + z) of Al
3+
out of 0.24 M
hydrolyzes in the solution. With these, the
concentrations of various species in the solution are

z y M 24 . 0
3
Al

+
+ 2H
2
O
z y
2
) OH ( Al
+
+
+
y
3
O H
+

y
3
O H
+
+
z M 48 . 0
2
4
SO

z
4
HSO
+ H
2
O
Thus, K
h
=
) z y M 24 . 0 (
) y )( z y (

+
= 1.4 10
5
M ...(i)
K
2
=
) z M 48 . 0 ( y
z
=
M 10 26 . 1
1
2
...(ii)
From Eq. (ii), we get
z =
y ) M 10 26 . 1 (
y ) M 48 . 0 (
2
+

Substituting this in Eq. (i), we get

|
|
.
|
\
|
+

|
|
.
|
\
|
+
+
y ) M 10 26 . 1 (
y ) M 48 . 0 (
y 24 . 0
y
y ) M 10 26 . 1 (
y ) M 48 . 0 (
y
2
2
= 1.4 10
5

Making an assumption that y <<1.26 10
2
M, and
then solving for y, we get
[H
3
O
+
] = y = 2.932 10
4
M

5. The freezing point of an aqueous solution of KCN
containing 0.189 mol kg
1
was 0.704 C. On adding
0.095 mol of Hg(CN)
2
, the freezing point of the
solution became 0.530C. Assuming that the
complex is formed according to the equation
Hg(CN)
2
+ x CN

x
2 x
) CN ( Hg
+

Find the formula of the complex.
Sol. Molality of the solution containing only KCN is
m =
f
f
K
) T (
=
) mol kg K 86 . 1 (
) K 704 . 0 (
1
= 0.379 mol kg
1

This is just double of the given molality
( = 0.189 mol kg
1
) of KCN, indicating complete
dissociation of KCN. Molality of the solution after
the formation of the complex
m =
f
f
K
) T (
=
) mol kg K 86 . 1 (
) K 530 . 0 (
1
= 0.285 mol kg
1

If it be assumed that the whole of Hg(CN)
2
is
converted into complex, the amounts of various
species in 1 kg of solvent after the formation of the
complex will be
n(K
+
) = 0.189 mol,
n(CN
) = (0.189 x) mol
) ) CN ( Hg ( n
x
2 x+
= 0.095 mol
Total amount of species in 1 kg solvent becomes
n
total
= [0.189 + (0.189 x) + 0.095] mol
= (0.473 x) mol Equating this to 0.285 mol,
we get
(0.473 x) mol = 0.285 mol
i.e. x = (0.473 0.285) = 0.188
Number of CN

units combined =
mol 095 . 0
mol 188 . 0
= 2
Thus, the formula of the complex is
2
4
) CN ( Hg .

CHEMISTRY JOKES

Joke 1 :
If you succeeding in guessing the answer to the
previous joke, then you figure out this one:
Q: What is the chemical name of the following
benzene-like molecule?
4
\
C - C 4
/ \ /
C C
\ /
C - C
A : Metaphor

Joke 2 :
Q: What is the name of the molecule bunny-O-
bunny?
A: An ether bunny

Joke 3 :
Q: If H-two-O is the formula for water, what is the
formula for ice?
A: H-two-O-CUBED

Joke 4 :
Q: What is the chemical symbol for diarrhea?
A: (CO(NH
2
)
2
)
2

Joke 5 :
Q: Why do chemists like nitrates so much?
A: They're cheaper than day rates.

Joke 6 :
Q: What is the chemical formula for the molecules in
candy?
A: Carbon-Holmium-Cobalt-Lanthanum-Tellurium
or CHoCoLaTe

Joke 7 :
Here is a historical note: In the 1980's, in an effort
to increase public awareness about the importance
of chemistry, the American Chemical Society
posted billboards with a picture of C
6
H
10
and the
title, "It takes alkynes to make a world."

1. Let f (x) = sin x and
g(x) =
>

x x
x for x t t f
; 2 / sin
0 ; 0 ); ( {max
2

Discuss the continuity and differentiability of g(x) in
(0, )

2. Is the inequality sin
2
x

< x sin(sin x) true for
0 < x < /2 ? Justify your answer.

3. A shop sells 6 different flavours of ice-cream. In how
many ways can a customer choose 4 ice-cream cones
if
(i) they are all of different flavours;
(ii) they are not necessarily of different flavours;
(iii) they contain only 3 different flavoures;
(iv) they contain only 2 or 3 different flavoures ?

4. Using vector method, show that the internal
(external) bisector of any angle of a triangle divides
the opposite side internally (externally) in the ratio of
the other two sides containing the triangle.

5. Prove that
(a) cos x +
n
C
1
cos 2x +
n
C
2
cos 3x + ............
...... +
n
C
n

cos(n + 1)x = 2
n
. cos
n
x/2. cos |
.
|
\
| +
x
n
2
2

(b) sin x +
n
C
1
sin 2x +
n
C
2
sin 3x + ...............
....... +
n
C
n
sin(n + 1)x = 2
n

. cos
n
x/2 . sin
|
.
|
\
| +
x
n
2
2

6. In a town with a population of n, a person sands two
letters to two sperate people, each of whom is asked
to repeat the procedure. Thus, for each letter
received, two letters are sent to separate persons
chosen at random (irrespective of what happened in
the past). What is the probability that in the first k
stages, the person who started the chain will not
receive a letter ?
7. Prove the identity :

x
z zx
e
0
2
dz =
x
z x
e e
0
4 4
2 2
dz, deriving for the
function f (x) =
x
z zx
e
0
2
dz a differential equation
and solving it.

8. Prove that
sec sin n d
=
1
) 1 cos( 2

n
n

d n sec ) 2 sin( d.
Hence or otherwise evaluate

2 /
0 cos
3 sin 5 cos
d.

9. Find the latus rectum of parabola
9x
2
24 xy + 16y
2
18x 101y + 19 = 0.

10. A circle of radius 1 unit touches positive x-axis and
positive y-axis at A and B respectively. A variable
line passing through origin intersects the circle in two
points in two points D and E. Find the equation of the
lines for which area of DEB is maximum.

`t{xt|vt V{txzx
This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in mathematics that would be very helpful in facing
IIT JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and
we hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Shailendra Maheshwari
Joint Director Academics, Career Point, Kota Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
10
Set

Behavior

Behavior is a mirror in which everyone displays
his image.
Behavior is what a man does, not what he thinks,
feels, or believes.
Behave the way you'd like to be and soon you'll
be the way you behave.

1. as (a) = (b) = (c)
so by Rolles theorem there must exist at least a point
x = & x = each of intervals (a, c) & (c, b) such
that () = 0 & () = 0. Again by Rolles theorem,
there must exist at least a point x = such that
< < where () = 0
so
) ( ) (
) ( 2
c a b a
a f

+
) ( ) (
) ( 2
a b c b
b f

+
) ( ) (
) ( 2
b c a c
c f

f () = 0
so
) ( ) (
) (
c a b a
a f

+
) ( ) (
) (
a b c b
b f

+
) ( ) (
) (
b c a c
c f

=
2
1
f ()
where a < < b.

2. Required probability
1 .
6
5
.
6
5
.
6
5
........
6
5
.
6
1
=
2 r
6
5
|
.
|
\
|
.
6
1
(r 2) times
Note : any number in 1st loss
same no. does not in 2nd (any other comes).
Now 3rd is also diff. (and in same r 2 times)
Now (r 1)
th
& r
th
must be same.

3. 2s = a + b + c
ON = BN + BO
Let BN = x
2BN + 2CN + 2AR = 2s
x + (a x) + (b a + x) = s
x = s b
R
O
C
N
B
M
A
r
I (h,k)

so h = ON =
2
a
(s b)
=
2
2 2 b a s + +
=
2
c b
& r = k.
so r = k =
s
=
s
c s b s a s s ) )( )( (

r = k =
s
c s b s a s s ) )( )( (

2sk = ) )( )( ( c b a c b a a s s + +
= ) 2 )( 2 )( ( x a x a a s s +
2sk = ) 4 )( (
2 2
h a a s s
required locus is
4s
2
y
2
= A(a
2
4x
2
)
s
2
y
2
+ Ax
2
=
4
2
Aa

where A is = s (s a)
here h
2
< as so it is an ellipse

4. f (0) = c
f (1) = a + b + c & f (1) = a b + c
solving these,
a =
2
1
[f (1) + f (1) 2 f (0)] ,
b =
2
1
[f (1) f (1)] & c = f (0)
so f (x) =
2
) 1 ( + x x
f (1) + (1 x
2
) f (0) +
2
) 1 ( x x
f(1)
2 | f (x) | < | x | | x + 1 | + 2| 1 x
2
| + | x | | x 1| ;
as | f (1) | , | f (0) |, | f (1) | 1.
2 | f (x) | | x | (x + 1) + 2 (1 x
2
) + | x | (1 x) as
x [1, 1]
so 2 | f (x) | 2 (|x| + 1 x
2
) 2 .
4
5
so | f (x) |
4
5

Now as g (x) = x
2
f (1/x) =
2
1
(1 + x) f (1)
+ (x
2
1) f (0) +
2
1
(1 x) f (1)
so 2 | g (x) | | x + 1 | + 2 | 1 x
2
| + | 1 x|
2 | g (x) | x + 1 + 2 (1 x
2
) | + 1 x ;
as x [1, 1]
2 | g (x) | < 2x
2
+ 4 4.
|g (x) | 2.

5. Oil bed is being shown by the plane A PQ. be the
angle between the planes A PQ & A B C. Let A B
C be the x y plane with x-axis along A C and
origin at A. The P.V.s of the various points are
defined as follows
MATHEMATICAL CHALLENGES

SOLUTION FOR JANUARY ISSUE (SET # 9)
B
A C
B
A
P
Q
C

point C : b i
, point B : cos Ai
+ c sin A j
,
point Q : b i
z k
, point P : cos Ai
+ c sin A j
y k

normal vector to the plane A B C
=
1
n
r
= bc sin Ak

normal vector to the plane A'PQ =
2
n
r

= cz sin Ai
+ (by cz cos A) j
+ bc sin Ak

so cos =
| || |
.
1 1
2 1
n n
n n
r r
r r

=
2 / 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
] sin ) cos ( sin [
sin
A c b A cz by A z c
A bc
+ +

cos =
2 / 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
)] cos 2 ( sin [
sin
A bycz y b z c A c b
A c b
+ +

so tan =
A bc
A bycz y b z c
sin
] cos 2 [
2 / 1 2 2 2 2
+

so tan . sin A = A
bc
yz
c
y
b
z
cos
2
2
2
2
2
+

6.
x
x x
5 cos 2 1
7 cos 8 cos
.
x
x
5 sin 2
5 sin 2
dx
=
+
+
) 10 sin 5 (sin 2
2 sin 12 sin 3 sin 13 sin
x x
x x x x
dx
=
+
+
) 10 sin 5 (sin 2
12 sin 3 sin 2 sin 13 sin
x x
x x x x
dx
=
2
5
cos
2
15
sin . 2 . 2
2
9
cos
2
15
sin 2
2
11
cos
2
15
sin 2
x x
x x x x
dx
=
2
5
cos 2
2
9
cos
2
11
cos
x
x x
dx
=
2
5
cos 2
2
sin 5 sin 2
x
x
x
dx
= 2
|
.
|
\
|
2
sin
2
5
sin
x x
dx
=
|
.
|
\
|
2
4
cos
2
6
cos
x x
dx
=
dx x x ) 2 cos 3 (cos
=
3
3 sin x

2
2 sin x
+ C

7.
2
2
dx
y d
= 2
x
dt t f
0
) (
integrate using by parts method

dx
dy
= 2
(
(

x x
dx x f x dt t f x
0 0
) ( . ) (
= 2
(
(
x
dt t f t x
0
) ( ) (
again integrating,
y = 2
(
(
|
|
.
|
\
|

dx dt t f x dt t f t x x
x x x
0 0 0
0 ) ( ) ( ) (
=2
(
(
+

dx x f
x
dt t f
x
dt t f t x x
x x x
0
2
0
2
0
) (
2
) (
2
) ( ) (
=
x
dt t f xt x
0
2
) ( ) ( 2
x
dt t f x
0
2
) ( +
x
dt t f t
0
2
) (
y =
+
x
dt t f t xt x
0
2 2
) ( ) 2 ( =
x
dt t f t x
0
2
) ( ) (

8. To prove that
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
/ 1
1
b
a
<
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
/ 1
1
b
a

Let
b
a
= c > 0
so (c
+ 1)
1/
< (c
+ 1)
1/
.
Let f (x) = (c
x
+ 1)
1/x
; x > 0
f (x) = (c
x
+ 1)
1/x
ln (c
x
+ 1) |
.
|
\
|
2
1
x

+
x
1
(c
x
+ 1) x
1
1
. c
x
ln c
=
2
1
1
) 1 (
x
c
x
x
+
] ) 1 ( ) 1 ( [
x x x x
c n c c n c l l + + + < 0
so f (x) is decreasing function
so f () < f (). Hence proved.

9. Point P (x, 1/2) under the given condition are length
PB = OB

B (t, 1)
A
(t 1)
C
O
P

r = t ; so = t
from PAB :
2
PB
= PA sin
2

PB = 2 sin
2
t
........(1)
Now PBC =
2
=
2
t
;
so from PCB ;
2
=
2
t

so from PCB ;
PB
2 / 1
= sin
2
t
........(2)
from (1) & (2) PB = 1 ; so = t = /3
thus | PB |
2
= (t x)
2
+
4
1
= 1.
| t x | =
2
3
; t x =
2
3
; as t > x
so x =
3

2
3

10. Let x
n
= 1 n + 1 + n be rational, then

n
x
1
=
1 1
1
+ + n n
is also rational

n
x
1
=
2
1 1 + n n
is also rational
1 + n 1 n is also rational
as 1 + n + 1 n & 1 + n 1 n are rational
so 1 + n + 1 n must be rational
i.e. (n + 1) & (n 1) are perfect squares.
This is not possible as any two perfect squares differe
at least by 3. Hence there is not positive integer n for
which 1 n + 1 + n is a rational.

Regents Physics
You Should Know
Modern Physics :
The particle behavior of light is proven by the
A photon is a particle of light {wave packet}.
Large objects have very short wavelengths when
moving and thus can not be observed behaving
as a wave. (DeBroglie Waves)
All electromagnetic waves originate from
accelerating charged particles.
The frequency of a light wave determines its
energy (E = hf).
The lowest energy state of a atom is called the
ground state.
Increasing light frequency increases the kinetic
energy of the emitted photo-electrons.
As the threshold frequency increase for a photo-
cell (photo emissive material) the work function
also increases.
Increasing light intensity increases the number of
emitted photo-electrons but not their KE.

Mechanics :
Centripetal force and centripetal acceleration
vectors are toward the center of the circle- while
the velocity vector is tangent to the circle.
An unbalanced force (object not in equilibrium)
must produce acceleration.
The slope of the distance-tine graph is velocity.
The equilibrant force is equal in magnitude but
opposite in direction to the resultant vector.
Momentum is conserved in all collision systems.
Magnitude is a term use to state how large a
vector quantity is.

1. If
a
4
sin
+
b
4
cos
=
b a +
1
, show that

3
8
sin
a
+
3
8
cos
b
=
3
) (
1
b a +
.
Sol. Here
a
b a +
sin
4
+
b
b a +
cos
4
= 1
or sin
4
+ cos
4
+
a
b
sin
4
+
b
a
cos
4
= 1
or (sin
2
+ cos
2
)
2
2 sin
2
. cos
2

+
a
b
sin
4
+
b
a
cos
4
= 1
or
2
2
sin
|
|
.
|
\
|
a
b
2 .
a
b
sin
2
.
b
a
cos
2

+
2
2
cos
|
|
.
|
\
|
b
a
= 0
or
2
2 2
cos sin
|
|
.
|
\
|

b
a
a
b
= 0

a
b
sin
2
=
b
a
cos
2

or sin
2
=
b
a
cos
2

a
2
sin
=
b
2
cos
=
b a +
+
2 2
cos sin

sin
2
=
b a
a
+
, cos
2
=
b a
b
+

3
8
sin
a
+
3
8
cos
b
=
3
1
a
.
4
4
) ( b a
a
+
+
3
1
b
.
4
4
) ( b a
b
+

=
4
) ( b a
a
+
+
4
) ( b a
b
+
=
4
) ( b a
b a
+
+
=
3
) (
1
b a +

2. Let [x] stands for the greatest integer function find
the derivative of f(x) =
x x
x x
sin 3
2
]) 1 [ (
+
+ + , where it
exists in (1, 1.5). Indicate the point(s) where it does
not exist. Give reason(s) for your conclusion.
Sol. The greatest integer [x
3
+ 1] takes jump from 2 to 3 at
3
2 and again from 3 to 4 at
3
3 in [1, 1.5] and
therefore it is discontinuous at these two points. As a
result the given function is discontinuous at
3
2 and
hence not differentiable.
To find the derivative at other points we write :
in (1,
3
2 ), f(x) =
x x
x
sin
2
) 2 (
+
+
f (x) =
1 sin
2
) 2 (
+
+
x x
x
{x
2
+ sin x + (x + 2) (2x + cos x) log (x + 2)}
in (
3
2 ,
3
3 ), f(x) =
x x
x
sin
2
) 3 (
+
+ ,
f (x) =
1 sin
2
) 3 (
+
+
x x
x {x
2
+ sin x
+ (2x + cos x) (x + 3) log
e
(x + 3)}
in (
3
5 , 1.5), f(x) =
x x
x
sin
2
) 4 (
+
+ ,
f (x) =
1 sin
2
) 4 (
+
+
x x
x , {x
2
+ sin x + (2x + cos x)
(x + 4) log
e
(x + 4)}

3. The decimal parts of the logarithms of two numbers
taken at random are found to six places of decimal.
What is the chance that the second can be subtracted
from the first without "borrowing"?
Sol. For each column of the two numbers,
n(S) = number of ways to fill the two places by the
digits 0, 1, 2, ... , 9
= 10 10 = 100.

y

x

Let E be the event of subtracting in a column without
borrowing. If the pair of digits be (x, y) in the column
where x is in the first number and y is in the second
number then
E = {(0, 0), (1, 0), (2, 0), .. ,(9, 0),
(1, 1), (2, 1), ..., (9, 1),
(2, 2), (3, 2), ..., (9, 2),
(3, 3), (4, 3), ..., (9, 3),
......
(8, 8), (9, 8),
(9, 9)}
Experts Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
Students' Forum
MATHS
n(E) = 10 + 9 + 8 + ... + 2 + 1 =
2
11 . 10
= 55
the probability of subtracting without borrowing
in each column =
100
55
.
the required probability =
6
100
55
|
.
|
\
|
=
6
20
11
|
.
|
\
|
.

4. Let S be the coefficients of x
49
in given expression
f(x) and if P be product of roots of the equation
f(x) = 0, then find the value of
P
S
, given that :
f(x) = (x 1)
2
|
.
|
\
|
2
2
x
|
.
|
\
|
2
1
x |
.
|
\
|
3
3
x
|
.
|
\
|
3
1
x ,
......... |
.
|
\
|
25
25
x
|
.
|
\
|
25
1
x
Sol. Here we can write f(x) as :
f(x) =
)
`
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
25
25
... 3
3
2
2
) 1 (
x x x
x

)
`
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|

25
1
...
3
1
2
1
) 1 ( x x x x
Now roots of f(x) = 0 are;
1
2
, 2
2
, 3
2
, ..... , 25
2
and 1,
2
1
,
3
1
, .....,
25
1

Now f(x) is the polynomial of degree 50,
So coefficient of x
49
will be :
S = (sum of roots)
= (1
2
+ 2
2
+ ... + 25
2
) |
.
|
\
|
+ + + +
25
1
....
3
1
2
1
1
=
)
`
+

K
6
51 26 25
where, K =
=
25
1
1
n
n

S = (K + 5525).
Product of roots :
1
2
. 2
2
. 3
2
.... 25
2
. 1 .
2
1
.
3
1
....
25
1
= 1 . 2 . 3 ...25
P = 25 !
Hence
P
S
=
! 25
) 5525 K ( +
, where K =
=
25
1
1
n
n

5. A traveller starts from a certain place on a certain day
and travels 1 km on the first day and on subsequent
days, he travels 2 km more than the previous day.
After 3 days, a second traveller sets out from the
same place and on his first day he travels 12 km and
on subsequent days he travels 1 km more than the
previous day. On how many days will the second
traveller be ahead of the first?
Sol. The first traveller travels on different days as follow
(in km) 1, 1 + 2, 1 + 2 + 2, ... .
After 3 days the first traveller is already ahead by
(1 + 3 + 5) km, i.e., 9 km.
1 3 5

The second traveller travels on different days as
follows : 0, 0, 0, 12, 13, 14, ...
After n days from the day the second traveller starts,
the distance covered by the first
= 1 + 3 + 5 + (7 + 9 + ... to n terms)
= 1 + 3 + 5 + ... to (n + 3) terms
= (n + 3)
2

and the distance covered by the second
= 12 + 13 + 14 + ... to n terms
=
2
n
{24 + (n 1).1} =
2
) 23 ( + n n

The second traveller is ahead of the first on the n
th

day (after the second sets off) if

2
) 23 ( + n n
> (n + 3)
2

or n
2
+ 23n > 2(n
2
+ 6n + 9)
or n
2
11n + 18 < 0
or (n 2) (n 9) < 0.
So n 2 > 0 and n 9 < 0 ...(i)
or n 2 < 0 and n 9 > 0 ...(ii)
(i) n > 2 and n < 9
(ii) n < 2 and n > 0 (absurd)
Thus, from the begining of the 3
rd
day to the end of
the 9
th
day the second traveller is ahead of the first.
So, the second is ahead of the first on the 3
rd
, 4
th
, 5
th
,
..., 9
th
days (after the second sets off).
Hence, the required number of days = 7.

6. Let P(x) be a polynomial of degree n such that
P(i) =
1 + i
i
for i = 0, 1, 2 ..... n. If n is odd than find
the value of P(n + 1).
Sol. Let Q(x) = (x + 1) P(x) x
clearly Q(x) is polynomial of degree n + 1. Also
Q(i) = (i + 1)
1 + i
i
i = 0 for i = 1, 2, 3 .....n
Thus we can assume
Q(x) = kx(x 1) (x 2) ...... (x n) where k is a constant.
Now Q(1) = k(1)(2)(3) ...... (1 n)
1 = (1)
n + 1
k(n + 1) !
k =
! ) 1 n (
1
+
(Q n is odd)
Thus P(x) =
(
+
+

+
x
x
n x x x x
x ! ) 1 (
) )....( 2 )( 1 (
1
1
,
where n is odd , P(n + 1) = 1

Integration :
If
dx
d
f(x) = F(x), then
) (x F dx = f(x) + c, where c
is an arbitrary constant called constant of integration.
1.
dx x
n
=
1
1
+
+
n
x
n
(n 1)
2.
dx
x
1
= log x
3.
dx e
x
= e
x

4.
dx a
x
=
a
a
e
x
log

5.
dx x sin = cos x
6.
dx x cos = sin x
7.
dx x
2
sec = tan x
8.
dx x ec
2
cos = cot x
9.
sec x tan x dx = sec x

10.
cosec x cot x dx = cosec x

11.
sec x dx = log(sec x + tan x) = log tan |

.
|
\
|
+
4 2
x

12.
cosec x dx = log (cosec x + cot x) = log tan |

.
|
\
|
2
x

13.
tan x dx = log cos x

14.
cot x dx = log sin x

15.
2 2
x a
dx
= sin
1
a
x
= cos
1
a
x

16.
+
2 2
x a
dx
=
a
1
tan
1
a
x
=
a
1
cot
1
|
.
|
\
|
a
x

17.
2 2
a x x
dx
=
a
1
sec
1
a
x
=
a
1
cosec
1
|
.
|
\
|
a
x

18.
2 2
1
a x
=
a 2
1
log
a x
a x
+
, when x > a
19.
2 2
1
x a
dx =
a 2
1
log
x a
x a
+
, when x < a
20.
2 2
a x
dx
= log
)
`
+
2 2
a x x = cos h
1
|
.
|
\
|
a
x

21.
+
2 2
a x
dx
= log
)
`
+ +
2 2
a x x = sin h
1
|
.
|
\
|
a
x

22.
2 2
x a dx =
2
1
x
2 2
x a +
2
1
a
2
sin
1
|
.
|
\
|
a
x

23.
2 2
a x dx =
2
1
x
2 2
a x

2
1
a
2
log
)
`
+
2 2
a x x
24.
+
2 2
a x dx =
2
1
x
2 2
a x +
+
2
1
a
2
log
)
`
+ +
2 2
a x x
25.
) (
) (
x f
x f
dx = log f(x)
26.
) (
) (
x f
x f
dx = 2 ) (x f
Integration by Decomposition into Sum :
1. Trigonometrical transformations : For the
integrations of the trigonometrical products such as
sin
2
x, cos
2
x, sin
3
x, cos
3
x, sin ax cos bx, etc., they are
expressed as the sum or difference of the sines and
cosines of multiples of angles.
2. Partial fractions : If the given function is in the
form of fractions of two polynomials, then for its
integration, decompose it into partial fractions (if
possible).
Integration of some special integrals :
(i)
+ + c bx ax
dx
2

This may be reduced to one of the forms of the above
formulae (16), (18) or (19).
INTEGRATION
Mathematics Fundamentals
M
A
T
H
S
(ii)
+ + c bx ax
dx
2

This can be reduced to one of the forms of the above
formulae (15), (20) or (21).
(iii)
+ + c bx ax
2
dx
This can be reduced to one of the forms of the above
formulae (22), (23) or (24).
(iv)
+ +
+
c bx ax
dx q px
2
) (
,
+ +
+
c bx ax
dx q px
2
) (

For the evaluation of any of these integrals, put
px + q = A {differentiation of (ax
2
+ bx + c)} + B
Find A and B by comparing the coefficients of like
powers of x on the two sides.
1. If k is a constant, then

dx k = kx and
dx x f k ) ( = k
dx x f ) (
2.
dx x f x f )} ( ) ( {
2 1
=
dx x f ) (
1

dx x f ) (
2

Some Proper Substitutions :
1.
f(ax + b) dx, ax + b = t
2.
f(ax
n
+ b)x
n1
dx, ax
n
+ b = t
3.
f{(x)} (x) dx, (x) = t

4.
dx
x f
x f
) (
) (
, f(x) = t
5.
2 2
x a dx, x = a sin or a cos
6.
+
2 2
x a dx, x = a tan
7.
2 2
2 2
x a
x a
dx, x
2
= a
2
cos 2
8.
x a dx, a x = t
2

9.
x a
x a
dx, x = a cos 2
10.
2
2 x ax dx, x = a(1 cos )
11.
2 2
a x dx, x = a sec
Substitution for Some irrational Functions :
1.
+ + b ax q px
dx
) (
, ax + b = t
2

2.
+ + + c bx ax q px
dx
2
) (
, px + q =
t
1

3.
+ + + b ax r qx px
dx
) (
2
, ax + b = t
2

4.
+ + c ax r px
dx
2 2
) (
, at first x =
t
1
and then a + ct
2
= z
2

Some Important Integrals :
1. To evaluate
) )( ( x x
dx
,
|
|
.
|
\
|

x
x
dx,
) )( ( x x dx. Put x = cos

2
+ sin
2

2. To evaluate
+ x b a
dx
cos
,
+ x b a
dx
sin
,

+ + x c x b a
dx
sin cos

Replace sin x =
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
2
tan 1
2
tan 2
2
x
x
and cos x =
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
2
tan 1
2
tan 1
2
2
x
x

Then put tan
2
x
= t.
3. To evaluate
+ +
+
x c x b a
x q x p
sin cos
sin cos
dx
Put p cos x + q sin x = A(a + b cos x + c sin x)
+ B. diff. of (a + b cos x + c sin x) + C
A, B and C can be calculated by equating the
coefficients of cos x, sin x and the constant terms.
4. To evaluate
+ + x c x x b x a
dx
2 2
sin cos sin 2 cos
,
+ b x a
dx
2
cos
,
+ x b a
dx
2
sin

In the above type of questions divide N
r
and D
r
by
cos
2
x. The numerator will become sec
2
x and in the
denominator we will have a quadratic equation in tan
x (change sec
2
x into 1 + tan
2
x).
Putting tan x = t the question will reduce to the form
+ + c bt at
dt
2

5. Integration of rational function of the given form
(i)
+ +
+
4 2 4
2 2
a kx x
a x
dx, (ii)
+ +
4 2 4
2 2
a kx x
a x
dx, where
k is a constant, positive, negative or zero.
These integrals can be obtained by dividing
numerator and denominator by x
2
, then putting
x
x
a
2
= t and x +
x
a
2
= t respectively.
Integration of Product of Two Functions :
1.
f
1
(x) f
2
(x) dx = f
1
(x)
f
2
(x) dx | |

dx x f x f ) ( ) ( (
2
'
1
dx
Proper choice of the first and second functions :
Integration with the help of the above rule is called
integration by parts, In the above rule, there are two
terms on R.H.S. and in both the terms integral of the
second function is involve. Therefore in the product
of two functions if one of the two functions is not
directly integrable (e.g. log x, sin
1
x, cos
1
x, tan
1
x
etc.) we take it as the first function and the remaining
function is taken as the second function. If there is no
other function, then unity is taken as the second
function. If in the integral both the functions are
easily integrable, then the first function is chosen in
such a way that the derivative of the function is a
simple functions and the function thus obtained under
the integral sign is easily integrable than the original
function.
2.
+ ) sin( c bx e
ax
dx
=
2 2
b a
e
ax
+
[a sin (bx + c) b cos (bx + c)]
=
2 2
b a
e
ax
+
sin
(
a
b
c bx
1
tan
3.
+ ) cos( c bx e
ax
dx
=
2 2
b a
e
ax
+
[a cos (bx + c) + b sin(bx + c)]
=
2 2
b a
e
ax
+
cos
(
a
b
c bx
1
tan
4.
e
kx
{kf(x) + f '(x)} dx = e
kx
f(x)
5.
x
e
log = x(log
e
x 1) = x log
e |
.
|
\
|
e
x

Integration of Trigonometric Functions :
1. To evaluate the integrals of the form
I =
sin
m
x cos
n
x dx, where m and n are rational
numbers.
(i) Substitute sin x = t, if n is odd;
(ii) Substitute cos x = t, if m is odd;
(iii) Substitute tan x = t, if m + n is a negative even
integer; and
(iv) Substitute cot x = t, if
2
1
(m + 1) +
2
1
(n 1) is an
integer.
2. Integrals of the form
R (sin x, cos x) dx, where R is

a rational function of sin x and cos x, are transformed
into integrals of a rational function by the substitution
tan
2
x
= t, where < x < . This is the so called
universal substitution. Sometimes it is more
convenient to make the substitution cot
2
x
= t for
0 < x < 2.
The above substitution enables us to integrate any
function of the form R (sin x, cos x). However, in
practice, it sometimes leads to extremely complex
rational functions. In some cases, the integral can be
simplified by
(i) Substituting sin x = t, if the integral is of the form
R (sin x) cos x dx.

(ii) Substituting cos x = t, if the integral is of the form
R (cos x) sin x dx.

(iii) Substituting tan x = t, i.e. dx =
2
1 t
dt
+
, if the
integral is dependent only on tan x.
Some Useful Integrals :
1. (When a > b)
+ x b a
dx
cos

=
2 2
2
b a
tan
1
(
(
2
tan
x
b a
b a
+ c
2. (When a < b)
+ x b a
dx
cos

=
2 2
1
a b
log
b a
a
x
a b
b a
a
x
a b
+ +
+
tan
tan

3. (when a = b)
+ x b a
dx
cos
=
a
1
tan
2
x
+ c
4. (When a > b)
+ x b a
dx
sin

=
2 2
2
b a
tan
1
+ |
.
|
\
|
2 2
2
tan
b a
b
x
a
+ c
5. (When a < b)
+ x b a
dx
sin

=
2 2
1
a b
log
2 2
2 2
2
tan
2
tan
a b b
x
a
a b b
x
a
+ + |
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
+ c
6. (When a = b)
+ x b a
dx
sin
=
a
1
[tan x sec x] + c


Functions with their Periods :

Function Period
sin (ax + b), cos (ax + b), sec (ax + b),
cosec (ax + b)
2/a
tan(ax + b), cot (ax + b) /a
|sin (ax + b)|, |cos (ax + b)|, |sec (ax + b)|,
|cosec (ax + b)|
/a
|tan (ax + b)|, |cot (ax + b)| /2a

Trigonometrical Equations with their General
Solution:

Trgonometrical equation General Solution
sin = 0 = n
cos = 0 = n + /2
tan = 0 = n
sin = 1 = 2n + /2
cos = 1 = 2n
sin = sin = n + (1)
n

cos = cos = 2n
tan = tan = n +
sin
2
= sin
2
= n
tan
2
= tan
2
= n
cos
2
= cos
2
= n
*
cos cos
sin sin
=
=

= 2n +
*
tan tan
sin sin
=
=

= 2n +
*
cos cos
tan tan
=
=

= 2n +

* If be the least positive value of which satisfy
two given trigonometrical equations, then the general
value of will be 2n + .
Note :
1. If while solving an equation we have to square it,
then the roots found after squaring must be
checked whether they satisfy the original equation
or not. e.g. Let x = 3. Squaring, we get x
2
= 9,
x = 3 and 3 but x = 3 does not satisfy the
original equation x = 3.
2. Any value of x which makes both R.H.S. and
L.H.S. equal will be a root but the value of x for
which = will not be a solution as it is an
indeterminate form.
3. If xy = xz, then x(y z) = 0 either x = 0 or
y = z or both. But
x
y
=
x
z
y = z only and not
x = 0, as it will make = . Similarly, if ay = az,
then it will also imply y = z only as a 0 being a
constant.
Similarly, x + y = x + z y = z and x y = x z
y = z. Here we do not take x = 0 as in the
above because x is an additive factor and not
multiplicative factor.
4. When cos = 0, then sin = 1 or 1. We have to
verify which value of sin is to be chosen which
satisfies the equation cos = 0 = |
.
|
\
|
+
2
1
n
If sin = 1, then obviously n = even. But if
sin = 1, then n = odd.
Similarly, when sin = 0, then = n and cos = 1
or 1.
If cos = 1, then n is even and if cos = 1, then
n is odd.
5. The equations a cos b sin = c are solved as
follows :
Put a = r cos , b = r sin so that r =
2 2
b a +
and = tan
1
b/a.
The given equation becomes
r[cos cos sin sin ] = c ;
cos ( ) =
r
c
provided
r
c
1.
Relation between the sides and the angle of a triangle:
1. Sine formula :
TRIGONOMETRICAL
EQUATION
Mathematics Fundamentals
M
A
T
H
S

a
A sin
=
b
B sin
=
c
C sin
=
R 2
1

Where R is the radius of circumcircle of triangle
ABC.
2. Cosine formulae :
cos A =
bc
a c b
2
2 2 2
+
, cos B =
ac
b c a
2
2 2 2
+
,
cos C =
ab
c b a
2
2 2 2
+

It should be remembered that, in a triangle ABC

If A = 60, then b
2
+ c
2
a
2
= bc
If B = 60, then a
2
+ c
2
b
2
= ac
If C = 60, then a
2
+ b
2
c
2
= ab
3. Projection formulae :
a = b cos C + c cos B, b = c cos A + a cos C
c = a cos B + b cos A
Trigonometrical Ratios of the Half Angles of a Triangle:
If s =
2
c b a + +
in triangle ABC, where a, b and c are
the lengths of sides of ABC, then
(a) cos
2
A
=
bc
a s s ) (
, cos
2
B
=
ac
b s s ) (
,
cos
2
C
=
ab
c s s ) (

(b) sin
2
A
=
bc
c s b s ) )( (
, sin
2
B
=
ac
c s a s ) )( (
,
sin
2
C
=
ab
b s a s ) )( (

(c) tan
2
A
=
) (
) )( (
a s s
c s b s

,
tan
2
B
=
) (
) )( (
b s s
c s a s

, tan
2
C
) (
) )( (
c s s
b s a s

Napier's Analogy :
tan
2
C B
=
c b
c b
+
cot
2
A
, tan
2
A C
=
a c
a c
+
cot
2
B

tan
2
B A
=
b a
b a
+
cot
2
C

Area of Triangle :
=
2
1
bc sin A=
2
1
ca sin B =
2
1
ab sin C
=
) sin(
sin sin
2
1
2
C B
C B a
+
=
) sin(
sin sin
2
1
2
A C
A C b
+
=
) sin(
sin sin
2
1
2
B A
B A c
+

sin A =
bc
2
) )( )( ( c s b s a s s =
bc
2

Similarly sin B =
ca
2
& sin C =
ab
2

Some Important Results :
1. tan
2
A
tan
2
B
=
s
c s
cot
2
A
cot
2
B
=
c s
s

2. tan
2
A
+ tan
2
B
=
s
c
cot
2
C
=
c
(s c)
3. tan
2
A
tan
2
B
=
b a
(s c)
4. cot
2
A
+ cot
2
B
=
2
tan
2
tan
2
tan
2
tan
B A
B A
+
=
c s
c
cot
2
C

5. Also note the following identities :
(p q) = (p q) + (q r) + (r p) = 0
p(q r) = p(q r) + q(r p) + r(p q) = 0
(p + a)(q r) = p(q r) + a(q r) = 0
Solution of Triangles :
1. Introduction : In a triangle, there are six
elements viz. three sides and three angles. In
plane geometry we have done that if three of the
elements are given, at least one of which must be
a side, then the other three elements can be
uniquely determined. The procedure of
determining unknown elements from the known
elements is called solving a triangle.
2. Solution of a right angled triangle :
Case I. When two sides are given : Let the
triangle be right angled at C. Then we can
determine the remaining elements as given in the
following table.

Given Required
(i) a, b
tanA =
b
a
, B = 90 A, c =
A
a
sin

(ii) a, c
sinA =
c
a
, b = c cos A, B = 90 A

Case II. When a side and an acute angle are given
In this case, we can determine

Given Required
(i) a, A
B = 90 A, b = a cot A, c =
A
a
sin

(ii) c, A B = 90 A, a = c sin A, b = c cos A

a

PHYSICS

Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
1. In the circuit shown, the cell is ideal, with
e.m.f. = 15 V. Each resistance is of 3. The potential
difference across the capacitors in steady state
R=3 C=3F
R R
R R
15V
+

(A) 0 (B) 9 V (C) 12 V (D) 15 V

2. In a young double slit apparatus the screen is rotated
by 60 about an axis parallel to the slits. The slits
separation is 3mm, slits to screen distance (i.e AB) is 4
m & wavelength of light is 450 nm. The separation
between the 3
rd
dark fringe on the either side of B.

60
A B
screen
(A) 6 mm (B) 8 mm (C) 4 3 mm (D) 2 3 mm

3. A black body emits radiation at the rate P when its
temperature is T. At this temperature the wavelength
at which the radiation has maximum intensity is
0
. If
at another temperature T' the power radiated is P' &
wavelength at maximum intensity is
2
0
then
(A) P'T' = 32 PT (B) P'T' = 16 PT
(C) P'T' = 8 PT (D) P'T' = 4 PT
4. If two identical string are stretched such that there is
fractional increase in their length, the fractional
increase in length of first string is f and second string
is 2f. Then the ratio of their fundamental frequency
is. (Assume both obey the Hook Law i.e. tension
elongation in string) -
(A)
2
1
f 1
f 2 1
+
+
(B)
f 1
f 2 1
2
+
+

(C)
f 2 1
f 1
2
1
+
+
(D)
f 2 1
f 1
+
+

5. A infinite line charge of charge density lies along
the x axis and let the surface of zero potential passes
through (0, 5, 12) m. The potential at point
(2, 3, 4) is
z
V = 0
(0,5,12)
y

IIT-JEE 2012
XtraEdge Test Series # 10
Based on New Pattern
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus :
Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus
Instructions :
Section - I
Question 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
Question 10 to 13 are Reason and Assertion type question with one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and 1 mark for wrong answer.
Question 14 to 19 are passage based questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and 1 mark for wrong
answer.
Question 20 to 22 are Column Matching type questions. +6 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly
matched answer (i.e. +1 marks for each correct row) and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
(A)
0
2
ln
5
13
(B)
0
2

ln
3
13

(C)
0
4
ln
5
13
(D)
0

ln
3
13

6. A satellite is put in an orbit just above the earth
atmosphere with a velocity 5 . 1 times the velocity
for a circular orbit at that height. The initial velocity
imparted is horizontal. What would be the maximum
distance of satellite from earth when it is in the orbit-
(A) 3R (B) 4R (C) 2 R (D) 5 R

7. The density of a uniform rod with cross section area
A is , its specific heat capacity is C and the
coefficient of its linear expansion is . Calculate the
amount of heat that should be added in order to
increase the length of the rod by l.
(A)
l C A 2
(B)
l
C A

(C)
l C A
(D)

A 2
C l

8. For the system shown each spring has a stiffness of
175 N/m. The mass of the pulleys may be neglected.
The period of vertical oscillation of block (mass of
block is 28 kg)

k
k
Block
fricationless
surface
28 kg

(A) 2 s (B) 2 s (C)
5
s (D)
5
2 s

9. A uniform elastic rod of cross section area A, natural
length L and young modulus Y is placed on a smooth
horizontal surface. Now two horizontal force (of
magnitude F and 3F) directed along the length of rod
and in opposite direction act at two of its ends as
shown. After the rod has acquired steady state (i.e. no
further extension take place), the extension of the rod
will be

F 3F
Elastic rod

(A)
YA
F 2
L (B)
YA
F 4
L
(C)
YA
F
L (D)
YA 2
F 3
L
This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type questions. Use
the following Key to choose the appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.

10. Assertion (A) : As the earth revolves around the sun
it has an acceleration which is directed towards
centre of the sun.
Reason (R) : Angular momentum of the earth about
the sun remains constant.

11. Assertion (A) : In electric circuits , wires carrying
currents in opposite direction are often twisted
together.
Reason (R) : The magnetic field in the surrounding
space of a twisted wire system in not precisely zero.

12. Assertion (A) : A metal ball is floating in mercury.
Coefficient of volume expansion of metal is less than
that of mercury. If temperature is increased, fraction
of volume immersed of metal will increase.
Reason (R) : Effect of heating on density of mercury
will be more compared to that of metal.

13. Assertion (A) : Work done by static friction is
always zero.
Reason (R) : Static friction acts when there is no
relative motion between two bodies in contact.

This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
each wrong answer.

Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
A conducting rod PQ of mass M rotates without
friction on a horizontal plane about on circular
rails of diameter 'l'. The centre O and the periphery
are connected by resistance R. The system is located
in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the
plane of the loop. At t = 0, PQ starts rotating
clockwise with angular velocity
0
. Neglect the
resistance of the rails and rod, as well as self
inductance.

B
O
0
Q
R
P

14. Magnitude of current as a function of time
(A)
t
2
0
e
R 2
B

l
(B)
t 2
2
0
e
R 16
B

l

(C)
t
2
0
e
R 8
B

l
(D)
t 2
2
0
e
R 8
B

l

Where =
RM 8
B 3
2 2
l

15. Total charge flow through resistance till rod PQ stop
rotating .
(A)
B 8
M
0
(B)
B 3
M
0
(C)
B 6
M
0
(D)
B 9
M
0

16. Heat generated in the circuit by t =
(A)
24
M
2
0
2
l
(B)
8
M
2
0
2
l
(C)
3
M
2
0
2
l
(D)
32
M
2
0
2
l

A cylindrical spool of radius R is rigidly attached to a
pulley of radius 2R. The mass of the combination is
m and the radius of gyration about the centroidal axis
G is R. A constant horizontal force F is applied at
one end of the tape. Assume rolling motion between
the pulley and the ground. I is the moment of inertia
about centroidal axis.

2R
G
R
P
F

17. The acceleration of point P on the tape relative to the
ground is -
(A)
m 2
F
(B)
m 5
F
(C)
m 3
F
(D)
m 4
F

18. The length of the tape wound/unwound on the spool
in time t is -
(A)
m 10
Ft
2
(B)
m 5
Ft
2
(C)
m 4
Ft
2
(D)
m 2
Ft
2

19. The linear acceleration of centre G is -
(A)
I
FR 2
2
(B)
2
2
mR I
FR 2
+

(C)
2
2
mR 2 I
FR 2
+
(D)
2
2
mR 4 I
FR 2
+

This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two columns
which have to be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in
Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S)
in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be
appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following
example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R,
C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 4
matrix should be as follows :
A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
20. A charged particle passes through a region that could
have electric field only or magnetic field only or both
electric and magnetic field or none of the fields.
Match the possibilities
Column-I
(A) Kinetic energy of the particle remain constant.
(B) Acceleration of the particle is zero
(C) Kinetic energy of the particle changes and it also
suffers deflection
(D) Kinetic energy of the particle changes but it
suffers no deflection
Column-II
(P) Under special condition this is possible when
both electric and magnetic fields are present
(Q) The region has electric field
(R) The region has magnetic field only
(S) The region contains no field

21. Match the column :
Column-I
Phenomena on which machine work
(A) Electromagnetic induction
(B) Light of suitable frequency falling on a material
result in emissions of electrons from the material
(C) Change of orientation of a coil in a magnetic
field results in e.m.f. across the coil
(D) Mutual induction
Column-II
Machine or instrument
(P) Photocell
(Q) DC motor
(R) AC generator
(S) Transformer
22. Match the column :
Column-I
(A) A photon stimulates the emission of another
photon of
(B) Photons of electromagnetic wave of different
wavelengths may have
(C) Two points on a wavefront must have
(D) For constructive interference the waves must
have
Column-II
(P) Same direction
(Q) Same energy
(R) Same phase
(S) Same frequency

CHEMISTRY

1. The phenomenon of optical activity will be shown by -
(A)

B
A
B
B B
A
M

(B)

A
B
M
A
B
en

(C)
A
A
en
en
M
(D)

B
B
M
en
en

2. Titration curve of Na
2
CO
3
and HCl is as given below.
The indicators In
1
and In
2
respectively, must be

10
20 30 40 50 60
2
4
6
8
10
12
In
1
In
2
pH
Volume of HCl (ml)

(A) phenolphthalein and methyl orange
(B) methyl orange and phenolphthalein
(C) methyl orange and phenol red
(D) phenolphthalein and phenol red.

3. Metallic sulphates can be obtained by reacting the
metals (above hydrogen in ECS), or its oxide,
hydroxide or carbonate with dil.H
2
SO
4
. Gp IA
metals also form hydrogen sulphates which can be
isolated in solid. In general metal sulphates are
soluble in water and crystallizes with water of
crystallization. Sulphate are thermally more stable
than nitrates. Select the stable hydrogen sulphate
which can be obtained in solid state -
(A) KHSO
4
(B) CaHSO
4

(C) FeHSO
4
(D) All of these

4. Which of the following represent glyptal -
(A)

OCH
2
CH
2
OC
O
C
O
4

(B)

NH(CH
2
)
6
NHC(CH
2
)
4
O
C
O
4

(C)
O O
O
O
4

(D)
O
4
N
H

5. In the Cannizzaro's reaction given below :
2Ph CHO
OH
PhCH
2
OH + PhCOO
-

the slowest step is -
(A) the attack of OH
at the carbonyl group

(B) the transfer of hydride to the carbonyl group
(C) the abstraction of proton from the carboxylic acid
(D) the deprotonation of PhCH
2
OH

6. The relative rates of solvolysis in 80% EtOH of the
following bromides is in the order

Br
I
Br
II
Br
III

(A) I > II > III (B) III > II > I
(C) II > III > I (D) II > I > III

CAREER POINT
Correspondence & Test Series Courses Information

Courses of IIT-JEE
Study Material
Package
IIT-JEE 2012
All India Test
Series
IIT-JEE 2012
(At Center)
Postal All India
Test Series
IIT-JEE 2012
Major Test Series
IIT-JEE 2012
(At Center)
Postal Major Test
Series
IIT-JEE 2012
(By Post)
CP Ranker's
Package
IIT-JEE 2012
Study
Material
Package
IIT-JEE 2013
All India
Foundation
Test Series IIT-
JEE 2013
(At Center)
Postal All
India Test
Series
IIT-JEE 2013
Eligibility for
Admission
Class 12th or 12th
Pass Students
Class 12th or 12th
Pass Students
Class 12th or 12th
Pass Students
Class 12th or 12th
Pass Students
Class 12th or 12th
Pass Students
Class 12th or 12th
Pass Students
Class 11th
Students
Class 11th
Students
Class 11th
Students
Medium English or Hindi English English English English English English or Hindi English English
Test Center Postal
visit our website or
contact us
Postal
contact us
Postal Postal Postal
visit our website
or contact us
Postal
Issue of Application
Kit
Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
Date of Dispatch/
First Test
Immediate Dispatch 15 Aug 11 onwards 15 Aug 11 onwards
15 Jan 2012
onwards
15 Jan 2012
onwards
Immediate Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
15 Aug 11
onwards
15 Aug 11
onwards
Course Fee 9000 3600 1500 1000 700 900 9800 4500 2500
COURSE
INFORMATION

For Class 12
th
/ 12
th
Pass Students For Class 11
th
Students

Courses of AIEEE
For Class 11
th
Students
Study Material
Package
AIEEE 2012
All India Test
Series
AIEEE 2012
(At Center)
Postal All India
Test Series
AIEEE 2012
Major Test Series
AIEEE 2012
(At Center)
Postal Major Test
Series
AIEEE 2012
(By Post)
CP Ranker's
Package
AIEEE 2012
Study
Material
Package
AIEEE 2013
Eligibility for
Admission
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass
Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 11
th
Students
Medium English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi
Test Center Postal
contact us
Postal
contact us
Issue of
Application Kit
Immediate
Dispatch
Date of Dispatch/
First Test
15 Jan 2012
onwards
15 Jan 2012
onwards
Immediate Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
Course Fee 9000 3600 1500 1000 700 900 9800
COURSE
INFORMATION

For Class 12
th
/ 12
th
Pass Students

Courses of Pre-Medical
Study Material
Package
AIPMT 2012
All India Test
Series
AIPMT 2012
(At Center)
Postal All India
Test Series
AIPMT 2012
Major Test Series
AIPMT 2012
(At Center)
Postal Major Test
Series
AIPMT 2012
(By Post)
CP Ranker's
Package
AIPMT 2012
Study
Material
Package
AIPMT 2013
All India
Foundation
Test Series
AIPMT 2013
(At Center)
Postal All
India Test
Series
AIPMT 2013
Eligibility for
Admission
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass
Students
Class 12
th
or 12th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 12
th
or 12
th
Pass Students
Class 11
th
Students
Class 11
th
Students
Class 11
th
Students
Medium English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English English English or Hindi English English
Test Center Postal
contact us
Postal
contact us
visit our website
or contact us
Postal
Issue of Application
Kit
Immediate
Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
Date of Dispatch/
First Test
15 Jan 2012
onwards
15 Jan 2012
onwards
Immediate Dispatch
Immediate
Dispatch
15 Aug 11
onwards
15 Aug 11
onwards
Course Fee 9000 3600 1500 1000 700 900 9800 4500 2500
COURSE
INFORMATION

For Class 12
th
/ 12
th
Pass Students For Class 11
th
Students

For details about all correspondence & test Series Course Information, Please visit our website.: www.careerpointgroup.com



7. NaOH can be prepared by two methods each of the
method has two steps having 100% yield.
Method I : 2Na + 2H
2
O 2NaOH + H
2
2H
2
+ O
2
2H
2
O
Method II : 2Na +
2
1
O
2
Na
2
O
Na
2
O + H
2
O 2NaOH
Which of the above method gives better yield of
NaOH ?
(A) Method I
(B) Method II
(C) Method I & Method II give equal yields.
(D) Yield cannot be determined

8. Which of the following value is correspond to the
maximum dipole moment of the triatomic molecule
XY
2
X

Y
Y

(A) = 90 (B) = 120 (C) = 150 (D) 180

9. Photons having energy equivalent to binding energy
of 2
nd
state of Li
+
ion are used at metal surface of
work function 10.6 eV. If the ejected electrons are
further accelerated through the potential difference of
5 V then the minimum value of de-Broglie
wavelength associated with the electron is
(A) 2.45 (B) 9.15 (C) 5 (D) 11

each wrong answer.
explanation of (A).
10. Assertion (A) :

N
O
O
N
O
O
O
O
is a macrocyclic ligand
Reason (R) : The ligand in which donor atoms are N
and O is known a cryptands.

11. Assertion (A) : For adsorption G, S and H all have
negative values.
Reason (R) : Adsorption is spontaneous process
accompained by increase in entropy.

12. Assertion (A) : For the concentration cell,
Zn(s) | Zn
2+
(aq)(C
1
) | | Zn
2+
(aq) (C
2
)/Zn, for
spontaneous cell reaction C
1
< C
2
.
Reason (R) : For concentration cell,E
cell
=
1
2
C
C
ln
nF
RT

For spontaneous reaction, E
cell
+ve C
2
> C
1

13. Assertion (A) : Aryl halides undergo nucleophilic
substitution with ease.
Reason (R) : Carbon-halogen bond in aryl halides
has partial double bond character.
each wrong answer.

FeCl
3
on reaction with K
4
[Fe(CN)
6
] in aqueous
solution gives blue colour, according the
equation
4FeCl
3
+ 3K
4
[Fe(CN)
6
] Fe
4
[Fe(CN)
6
]
3
+ 12 KCl
At 300 K two aqueous solution of K
4
[Fe(CN)
6
]

&
FeCl
3
with equal concentrations 0.1 M. These two
solutions are separated by a semipermeable
membrane AB as shown in figure.
A
B
0.1M 0.1M
FeCl
3
side'y'

side'x'
K
4
[Fe(CN)
6
]

14. What is correct
(A) side x is hypotonic
(B) side y is hypotonic
(C) both are isotonic
(D) None of these
15. What is true about the solutions
(A) blue colour forms in side x
(B) blue colour forms in side y
(C) blue colour forms on both sides
(D) No blue colour formation
16. By applying external pressure osmosis can be
stopped it should be applied to
(A) side x (B) side y
(C) equal on both the sides
(D) can not be stopped by applying external pressure
An activating group activates all positions of the
benzene ring; even the positions meta to it are more
reactive than any single position in benzene itself. It
directs ortho and para simply because it activates the
ortho and para positions much more than it does the
meta.
A deactivating group deactivates all positions in the
ring, even the positions meta to it. It directs meta
simply because it deactivates the ortho and para
positions even more than it does the meta. Thus, both
ortho and para orientation and meta orientation arise
in the same way : The effect of any group whether
activating or deactivating is strongest at the ortho and
para positions.
But certain groups ( NH
2
and OH, and their
derivatives) act as powerful activators towards
electrophilic aromatic substitution, even though they
contain electronegative atoms and can be shown in
other ways to have electron-withdrawing inductive
effects.
Halogens are unusual in their effect on electrophilic
aromatic substitution; they are deactivating yet ortho,
para-directing. Deactivation is characteristic of
electron withdrawal, whereas ortho-para orientation
is characteristic of electron release.
17. Which will undergo Friedel-Crafts alkylation
reaction?
(1)

CH
3

NO
2

(2)

CH
2
CH
3

(3)

COOH
(4)

OH

(A) 1, 2 and 4 (B) 1 and 3
(C) 2 and 4 (D) 1 and 2

18. Which of the following is the strongest acid ?
(A)

OH
NO
2

(B)

OH
Cl

(C)

OH
NO
2

(D)

OH
NO
2

19. Reactivity in halogen substituted benzene rings is
controlled by :
(A) resonance
(B) inductive effect
(C) inductive effect dominates resonance effect
(D) resonance effect dominates inductive effect

A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

20. One mole of an ideal gas is subjected to the following
process :
Column-I Column-II
(A) W = 0 (P) If the gas undergoes
free expansion
(B) E = 75C
v
(Q) If the gas is cooled
reversibly at constant
pressure from 373 K
to 298 K
(C) H = 75 C
p
(R) If the gas is heated
from 298 K to 373 K
reversively at constant
pressure
(D) W = 75 R (S) If the gas is heated
from 298 K to 373 K at
constant volume

21. Match the Column :
Column-I Column-II
(Gases X and Y (Tatio of times
taken of diffusion) taken)
(A) X = 100 ml of H
2
at 1 bar, 25 C (P) 1 : 1225
Y = 200 ml of O
2
at 2 bar, 25C
(B) X = 100 ml of O
2
at 1 bar, 25C (Q) 1 : 0.7
Y = 200 ml of O
3
at 2 bar, 25C
(C) X = 100 ml of SO
2
at 1 bar, 25C (R) 1 : 1.36
Y = 100 ml of O
2
at 1 bar, 25C
(D) X = HCl gas to travel 100 cm (S) 1 : 8
length in a tube
Y = NH
3
gas to travel 200 cm
length using the same tube
(P, V, T) = same in both cases)

Column-I Column-II
(A) Soluble in dil HCl (P) SrS
2
O
3

(B) Yields SO
2
with dil (Q) SrSO
3

HCl on bonding
(C) Soluble in aqueous (R) SrSO
4

solution
(D) Insoluble in aqueous (S) CdS
solution

MATHEMATICS


1. The area enclosed by | y | | x | = 1 and x
2
+ y
2
=1 is
(A) 2 units
2
(B) zero units
2

(C) infinite units
2
(D) none of these
2. Least value of the expression 9sec
2
+ 4cosec
2
, is-
(A) 6 (B) 1 (C) 36 (D) 25
3. Let f (x) =
+
x
dx x x x x
1
2 2 3
) ) 2 ( ) 1 ( 3 ) 2 )( 1 ( 2 ( ,
then-
(A) f has exactly 4 critical points

(B) f has maximum at x = 2
(C) x = 7/5 is minima & x = 1 is maxima

(D) none of these

4. The locus of the middle points of chords of a
parabola which subtend a right angle at the vertex of
the parabola is-
(A) Circle (B) Parabola
(C) Ellipse (D) Straight line

5. The probability that a particular day in the month of
july is a rainy day is 3/4. Two person whose
credibility are 4/5 and 2/3 respectively claim that 15
th

july was a rainy day. The probability that it was real
a rainy day.
(A) 3/4 (B) 24/25 (C) 8/9 (D) none
6. Domain of f (x) =
|
|
.
|
\
|
] [
] [ 2
sin
1
x
x x
, where [.] denotes
the greatest integer function, is
(A) (, 1) {0} (B) |
.
|
0 ,
3
4
{0}
(C) (, 0) I
+
(D) (, ) [0, 1)

7. The number of different words of three letters which
can be formed from the word "PROPOSAL", if a
vowel is always in the middle are-
(A) 53 (B) 52
(C) 63 (D) 32

8. Let a
1
, a
2
, a
3
, ...... be terms of an A.P. If
q
p
a a a
a a a
+ + +
+ + +
.....
....
2 1
2 1
=
2
2
q
p
, p q, then
21
6
a
a
equals-
(A) 41/11 (B) 7/2
(C) 2/7 (D) 11/41

9. The curve y = ax
3
+ bx
2
+ cx is inclined by 45 to
x-axis at origin and it touches x-axis at (1,0). Then-
(A) a = 2, b = 1, c = 1 (B) a = 1, b = 1, c = 2
(C) a = 1, b = 2, c = 1 (D) a = 1, b = 2, c = 1

each wrong answer.
explanation of (A).

10. Assertion (A) : Let z be a complex number satisfying
|z 3| |z 1|, |z 3| |z 5|, |z i| |z + i|
and |z i| |z 5i|. Then the area of region in which
z lies is 12 sq. units.
Reason (R) : Area of trapezium =
2
1
(sum of parallel
sides) (Distance between parallel sides)

11. Let f (x) = | 1 x | and g(x) = sin
1
(f | x |)
Assertion (A) : Number of values of x, where g(x) is
non differentiable is 3.
Reason (R) : Domain of g(x) is [1, 1]

12. Assertion (A) : If eccentricities of two ellipse are
same then their areas are also same.
Reason (R) : Area of the ellipse 1
b
y
a
x
2
2
2
2
= +
(a < b, a > 0, b > 0) is ab square units.

13. Consider a circle S : (x 2)
2
+ (y 3)
2
= 13 and a line
L : y = x 12.
Assertion (A) : Chord of contact of pair of tangents
drawn from every point on L = 0 to S = 0 passes
through P(3, 2)
Reason (R) : Pole of polar L = 0 with respect to
S = 0 is P(3, 2)

each wrong answer.
If f (xy) = f (x) . f (y) and f is differentiable at x = 1
such that f '(1) = 1 also f (1) 0, then
14. f (x) is -
(A) continuous for all x R
(B) discontinuous at x = 1, 0, 1
(C) differentiable for all x 0
(D) None of these
15. f '(7) equals-
(A) 7 (B) 14 (C) 1 (D) None

16. Area bounded by curve f(x), x axis and ordinate
x = 4, is-
(A) 64/3 (B) 8 (C) 16 (D) None
There exists a G.P. with first term
A
1
and common
ratio A (A > 1). If we add
2
1
in the sum of first n
terms of the sequence, it equals to the sum of the
coefficients of even power of x in the expansion of
(1 + x)
n
. If we interchange the first term & common
ratio of given G.P., the sum of new infinitely
decreasing G.P. is equal to B, where A, B and n are
related by the relation
+
2 B
2 A
n
dx ) x 1 ( =
3
364

17. The value of
A x
B n ) x 1 (
lim
A
A x
+
is-
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C) e (D) 8

18. Area bounded by f(x) = x
A
and g(x) = x
B
is-
(A)
n
B A+
(B)
n
A B

(C)
n B 2 A
A 2
+ +
(D)
B A n
B
+ +

19. Number of real roots of the equation
(x
B
nx
A
)
1/A
= 6 are
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 1 (D) 0

A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S


Column-I Column-II
(A) The reflection of the point (P) 5
(t 1, 2t + 2) in a line is
(2t + 1, t) then the line has
slope equal to
(B) If be the angle between (Q) 6
two tangents which are drawn
to the circle x
2
+ y
2
6 3 x 6y + 27 = 0
from the origin, then 2 3 tan
equals to
(C) The shortest distance between (R) 7 2
parabolas y
2
= 4x and y
2
= 2x 6
is d then d
2
=
(D) Distance between foci of the (S) 1
curve represented by the equation
x = 1 + 4cos, y = 2 + 3sin is

21. Column-I Column-II

(A) If y = 2[x] + 9 = 3[x + 2], where (P) 1
[.] denotes greatest integer function,
then
6
1
[x + y] is equal to
(B) If
x
x x
1
cos
x
1
sin lim |
.
|
\
|
+

= e
k/2
then (Q) 0
k is equal to
(C) If three successive terms of a G.P. (R) 2
with common ratio r, (r > 1) forms
the sides of a triangle then [r] + [r]
is equal to (where [.] denotes
greatest integer function)
(D) Let f(x) = (x
2
3x + 2)(x
2
+3x+2) (S) 3
and , , are the roots of
f '(x) = 0, then []+[] + [] is
equal to (where [.] denotes greatest
integer function)

(A) The order and degree of the (P) 13
differential equation
0 x 7
dx
y d
4
dx
dy
2
2
3
= are
a and b then a + b is
(B) If k
3 j
2 i
a + + =
r
, k
2 b + =
r
(Q) 102
and k
2 i
3 c + + =
r
and ) c b ( a
r
r
r

is equal to c z b y a x
r
r
r
+ + , then
x + y + z is equal to
(C) The number of 4 digit numbers (R) 5
that can be made with the digits
1,2,3,4,3,2
(D) If
+ + ) 4 x )( 1 x (
dx
2 2
= (S) 7
k
d
x
tan
c
a
x tan
b
a
1 1
+ |
.
|
\
|

where k is constant of integration,
then 2a + b + c + d is
(where a & b and a & c are
co-prime numbers)

Chemistry Facts
At 0 degress Celsius and 1 atmospheric pressure,
one mole of any gas occupies approximately
22.4 liters.
Atomic weight is the mass of an atom relative to
the mass of an atom of carbon-12 which has an
atomic weight of exactly 12.00000 amu.
If the atom were the size of a pixel (or the size
of a period), humans would be a thousand miles
tall.
It would require about 100 million
(100,000,000) atoms to form a straight line one
centimeter long.
The weight (or mass) of a proton is
1,836.1526675 times heavier than the weight (or
mass) of an electron.
The electron was first discovered before the
proton and neutron, in 1897 from English
physicist John Joseph Thomson.
The neutron was discovered after the proton in
1932 from British physicist James Chadwick,
which proved an important discovery in the
development of nuclear reactors.
Carbon dioxide was discovered by Scottish
chemist Joseph Black.
When silver nitrate is exposed to light, it results
in a blackening effect. (Discovered by Scheele,
which became an important discovery for the
development of photography).

PHYSICS

1. Ice point on a particular scale measure 22. The scale
agrees with Fahrenheit scale at 72F. The
temperature in Fahrenheit scale when new scale
reads 27 is -
(A) 40F (B) 38F (C) 36F (D) 34F

2. A hot body is kept in a chamber maintained at fixed
lower temperature. Time taken by body in loosing
half the maximum heat it can lose is
5 min. Time taken by body in loosing the maximum
heat it can lose is -
(A) 10 min (B) 12 min (C) 20 min (D) Infinite
3. A point source of power 4 W is placed at the centre
of spherical shell. The shell is kept in a vacuum
chamber maintained at 27C. If shell attains a
constant temperature 37C, emissivity of surface of
shell is nearly -
(A)
2
1
(B)
3
1
(C)
3
2
(D)
5
4

4. In a resonancecolumn experiment, a long tube, open
at top, is clamped vertically. Water level inside tube
can be moved up or down. First resonance is
occuring when water level is at depth 20 cm below
open end. Let second resonance occurs when water
level is at a distance x below opening, then -
(A) x = 40 cm (B) x = 60 cm
(C) x < 60 cm (D) x > 60 cm

5. Figure shows a toy-whistle. It a disk made of plastic
having two conical grooves at diametrically opposite
point. When it is rotated about its centre with
sufficiently high speed air intercepted by groove
produce whistling sound. An observer is at a distance
10 m from the centre of toy. Radius of toy is 15 cm.
Frequency of sound emitted by toy when it is rotating
with =
1800
rpm is 10 kHz. If velocity of sound
in air 300 m/s, beat frequency heard by observer is

O

(A) 10 Hz (B) 15 Hz (C) 20 Hz (D) None
6. An ice cube is fixed at the bottom of container
containing water. Water in the container will be
cooled majorly by -
(A) Convection (B) Conduction
(C) Radiation (D) Convection and conduction
7. In a region of space a constant force F newton acts
on a particle of mass m, which is released from rest
at point A. When the particle reaches B its

A B
m
F

IIT-JEE 2013
XtraEdge Test Series # 10
Based on New Pattern
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus :
Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus
Instructions :
Question 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
Question 10 to 13 are Reason and Assertion type question with one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and 1 mark for wrong answer.
Question 14 to 19 are passage based questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and 1 mark for wrong
answer.
Question 20 to 22 are Column Matching type questions. +6 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly
matched answer (i.e. +1 marks for each correct row) and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
(A) potential energy (PE) increases but kinetic energy
(KE) decreases.
(B) PE decreases but KE increases.
(C) PE remains constant but KE increases.
(D) PE decreases but KE remains constant

8. A L shaped rod whose one rod is horizontal and other
is vertical is rotating about a vertical axis as shown
with angular speed . The sleeve shown in figure has
mass m and friction coefficient between rod and
sleeve is . The minimum angular speed for which
sleeve cannot sleep on rod is

m

sleeve
l

(A)
l
=
g
(B)
l
g
=
(C)
g
=
l
(D) None of these

9. Four particles of equal mass M move along a circle of
radius R under the action of their mutual gravitational
attraction. The speed of each particle is -
(A)
R
GM
(B)
(
R
GM
2 2
(C)
(
+ ) 1 2 2 (
R
GM
(D)
(
(
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
4
1 2 2
R
GM

each wrong answer.
explanation of (A).

10. Assertion (A) : A string of length 28 cm, fixed at one
end vibrates in its 3
rd
overtone. Wave motion will not
be disturbed by holding the string at a distance 8 cm
from fixed end.
Reason (R) : Position of nodes in the above string
will at distance 4 cm, 8 cm, . from fixed end.
11. Assertion (A) : Two tube of same length but
different diameter vibrating in same harmonic.
Frequency of tube having smaller diameter will be
more.
Reason (R) : End-correction is less in tube of smaller
diameter.

12. Assertion (A) : When an observer moves towards
stationary source frequency heard by observer is
more than that frequency emitted by source.
Reason (R) : Wavelength of sound wave received by
observer becomes smaller.

13. Assertion (A) : At height h from ground and at depth
h below ground, where h is approximately equal to
0.62 R, the value of g acceleration due to gravity is
same.
Reason (R) : Value of g decreases both sides, in
going up and down.

each wrong answer.


A vertical cylindrical tube has its lower end closed.
There is small opening in the bottom of the tube by
which level of water in tube can be adjusted. Length
of tube is 50 cm. Velocity of sound in air and water
is 320 m/s and 1440 m/s respectively. Water is filled
in tube upto height 30 cm.
14. Minimum frequency with which tube can resonate is-
(A) 300 Hz (B) 320 Hz
(C) 400 Hz (D) 450 Hz

15. Minimum frequency so that standing waves can be
formed both in air and liquid column -
(A) 400 Hz (B) 800 Hz
(C) 640 Hz (D) 900 Hz

16. Air column in tube is resonating with a tuning fork at
its lowest possible frequency. Water level is lowered
slowly. Minimum distance by which water level has
to be lowered so that intensity of sound become
maximum is -
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm
(C) 40 cm (D) 50 cm

A wire of length 1 m is clamped horizontally between
two rigid support.
17. Wire is plucked at a distance 30 cm from one end.
Lowest harmonic in which wire can resonate is -
(A) 3rd (B) 4th (C) 5th (D) 10th

18. A light ring which can slip frictionlessly over wire is
slipped over wire. When a tuning fork start
resonating with wire, ring is found to be at rest at a
distance 15 cm from one end. If velocity of wave in
wire is 10 m/s, minimum frequency of tuning fork is-
(A) 50 Hz (B) 60 Hz
(C) 70 Hz (D) None of these

19. Now two light rings are slipped on wire which can
move frictionlessly. When wire is plucked, the two
rings are found to be at rest separated by 12 cm.
Maximum wavelength of wave in wire is -
(A) 4 cm (B) 8 cm
(C) 12 cm (D) 24 cm

A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

20. A small ring of mass m passes through a smooth wire
bent in form of horizontal circle. The ring is
connected to a spring whose other end is fixed at A
on the wire as shown. The natural length of spring is
R and spring constant is
R
mg
where m is mass of the
ring and R is also the radius of circle. Initially the
ring is released from rest from position B and it
moves towards C as in the figure. (N = Normal
reaction between wire and ring, v = speed of ring)
B
wire
C
A
60

Column-I Column-II
(A) N = mg (P) at position B
(B) N = zero (Q) at position C
(C) N = mg 2 (R) some where between
position B and position C
(D) v = gR (S) never
21. A body of mass m is acted upon by net force F
r
.
v and r be their initial position and velocity. All
quantity are in S.I. unit . Then match the following.
Column-I Column-II
(A) i
x 4 F
2
= , 0 r = , (P) Motion : S.H.M.
2 m , i
2 v = =
(B) j
) y 4 2 ( F = , 0 r = (Q) Motion : Non-periodic

0 v = , m = 1
(C) i
) x x ( 2 F
3
+ = , (R) Path : Straight line
i
10 r
2
= 0 v = , m = 1
(D) ) j
y i
x ( 4 F + = (S) Time period :

j
2 r = , 1 m , i
6 v = =

22. The cubical container filled with water is given
acceleration
a = a
0
i
+ a
0
j
+ a
0
k
, then : (neglect
the effect of gravity)
B
C
E F
D
G
A
z
x
y
H

Column-I Column-II
(A) Pressure at point A is (P) less than pressure
at point G
(B) Pressure at point D is (Q) less than pressure
at point F
(C) Pressure at point E is (R) Greater than
pressureat point C
(D) Pressure at point H is (S) Greater than pressure
at point B

CHEMISTRY

1. Which of the substance has maximum number of
hydrogen atoms per gm of the substance ?
At. wts. : Cu 63.5 ; S 32 ; O 16 ; H 1
(A) CH
4
(B) CuSO
4
.

5H
2
O
(C) H
2
O
2
(D) H
2
O
2. In the reaction 3 Cu + 8 HNO
3
3 Cu(NO
3
)
2
+

2NO + 4 H
2
O
what is the equivalent weight of HNO
3
? if molecular
weight of HNO
3
is M -
(A) M (B)
3
M
(C) M
4
3
(D) M
3
4

3. The order of magnitude of ionic radii of ions Na
+
,
Mg
2+
, Al
3+
and Si
4+
is :
(A) Na
+
> Si
4+
> Al
3+
> Mg
2+
(B) Mg
2+
> Na
+
> Al
3+
> Si
4+

(C) Na
+
> Mg
2+
> Al
3+
> Si
4+
(D) Si
4+
> Al
3+
> Mg
2+
> Na
+

4. The correct order of tendency of polymerization is -
(A) SiO
4
4
< PO
4
3
< SO
4
2
< ClO
4

(B) PO
4
3
< SiO
4
4
< SO
4
2
< ClO
4

(C) ClO
4

< SO
4
2
< SiO
4
4
< PO
4
3
(D) SiO
4
4
> PO
4
3
> SO
4
2
> ClO
4

5.
C
P
K
K
for the gaseous reaction
(a) 2 A + 3 B

2C
(b) 2 A

4B
(c) A + B + 2C 4D
would be respectively -
(A) (RT)
3
, (RT)
2
, (RT)
(B) (RT)
3
, (RT)
2
, (RT)
1

(C) (RT)
3
, (RT)
2
, (RT)
(D) None of the above

6. No. of heteroatoms (other than C) present in the
following heterocyclic compound is

O
NH
O

(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0

7. & are
(A) Tautomers (B) Functional
(C) Position (D) All the above

8. Which does not exists in solid state -
(A) LiHCO
3
(B) CaCO
3

(C) NaHCO
3
(D) Na
2
CO
3

9. Decomposition of H
2
O
2
is retarded by -
(A) Acetanilide (B) MnO
2

(C) Zinc (D) Finely divided metals
each wrong answer.
explanation of (A).

10. Assertion (A) : F atom has a less negative electron
gain enthalpy than Cl atom.
Reason (R) : Additional electron are repelled more
effectively by 3p electron in Cl atom than by 2p
electron in F atom.

11. Assertion (A) : When a non-volatile solute is added
to water ice equilibrium, some ice melts.
Reason (R) : Ice melts to dilute the solution in order
to increase the vapour pressure in accordance to
Le-Chatelier's principle.

12. Assertion (A) :

H
CN
is called
cyclohexancarbonitrile.
Reason (R) : It is an aromatic compound.

13. Assertion (A) : The following compounds are
optically inactive.

CH
3
H
CH
3
Cl
H Cl
CH
3
H
CH
3
Cl

H Cl

CH
3
H

CH
3
Cl

H

Cl

CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
3
H
CH
3
Cl
H Cl
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2

Reason (R) : the meso compounds do not have any
chiral C atom so have optical rotation is zero.

each wrong answer.


PCl
5
in solid state exists as PCl
4
+
and PCl
6
. Also in
some solvents it undergoes dissociation as
2PCl
5
PCl
4
+
+ PCl
6

14. The geometry and hybridisation of PCl
5
is -
(A) Trigonal bipyramid, sp
3
d
(B) Tetrahedral, sp
3

(C) Octahedral, sp
3
d
2
(D) none of these

4
+
is -
(A) Tetrahedral, sp
3

(B) Octahedral, sp
3
d
2

(C) Trigonal pyramid, sp
3
d
(D) See-saw, sp
3
d

6
is -
(A) Octahedral, sp
3
d
2
(B) Tetrahedral, sp
3
d
2

(C) Square planar bipyramid, sp
3
d
(D) See-saw, sp
3
d

The IE
1
and IE
II
in kJ/mol of a few elements are
given in the following table

Element IE
I
in kJ/Mol IE
II
in kJ//mol
P 2372 5251
Q 520 7300
R 900 1760
S 1680 3380

17. Which of the above element is likely to be alkali
metal ?
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S

18. Which of the above element is likely to be alkaline
earth metal ?
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S

19. Which of the above element is likely to be noble gas?
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S

A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S


(A) Primary standard base (P) Na
2
C
2
O
4

(B) Equiv. wt =
2
wt Molecular
(Q) Na
2
B
4
O
7

(C) Primary standard reducing (R) Na
2
CO
3

agent
(D) Capable of reducing (S) As
2
O
3

hardness of water due to
the presence of Ca
2+

(A) T
c
/P
c
(P) Z
(B) T
c
/V
c
(Q) a/Rb
(C) T
B
(R) 8b/R
(D) T
i
/T
B
(S) 8a/81 Rb
2

(A)

V
P
A
B
(P)
(B)
T
P
A
B
(Q) Isotherm
(C)
T
P
A
B
(R) Isochoric
Temperature
is increasing
(D)
B
A
T
P
(S) Pressure is increasing

MATHEMATICS

1. In a ABC, if r = r
2
+ r
3
r
1
and A > /3 then range
of
a
s
is equal to-
(A) |
.
|
\
|
2 ,
2
1
(B) |
.
|
\
|
,
2
1
(C) |
.
|
\
|
3 ,
2
1
(D) (3, )

2. Vector perpendicular to i
and in the plane of

i
+ j
+ k
and i
+ j
+ k
is
(A) i
+ k
(B) 2 i
+ j
+ k

(C) 3 i
+2 j
+ k
(D) 4 i
2 j
2 k

3. If a, b R, a 0 and roots of ax
2
bx + 1 = 0
imaginary, then a + b + 1 is
(A) Zero (B) Positive
(C) Negative (D) None of these

4. Number of distinct normals that can be drawn to the
curve x
2
= 4y from point (1, 2), is
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3

5. ABC is a triangle whose medians AD and BE are
perpendicular to each other. If AD = p and BE = q
then area of ABC is-
(A) pq
3
2
(B) pq
2
3
(C) pq
3
4
(D) pq
4
3

6. If (21.4)
a
= (0.00214)
b
=100, then the value of
a
1

b
1
is :
(A) rational but not integral
(B) prime
(C) irrational
(D) composite

7. For 3 r n

n
C
r
+ 3
n
C
r1

+ 3
n
C
r2 +
n
C
r3
is-
(A)
n+3
C
r
(B) 2
n+2
C
r+2
(C) 3
n+1
C
r+1
(D) 3
n
C
r

8. Point of intersection of straight lines represented by
6x
2
+ xy 40y
2
35x 83y + 11 = 0 is-
(A) (3, 1) (B) (3, 1) (C) (3, 1) (D) (3, 1)

9. Number of points outside the hyperbola
3x
2
y
2
= 48 from where two perpendicular tangents
can be drawn to the hyperbola is/are -
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) infinite (D) None

each wrong answer.
explanation of (A).
10. Assertion (A) : The length of the shortest intercept
made by the family of lines (1 + ) x + ( 1) y
+ 2 (1 ) = 0 on the parabola x
2
= 4(y 1) is 5.
Reason (R) : Latus rectum is the shortest focal chord
of the parabola.

11. Assertion (A) : If S
1
and S
2
are non-concentric
circles then their radical axis must exist.
Reason (R) : S
1
,S
2
, S
3
are three circles such that no two
are concentric then their radical centre is defined.

12. Assertion (A) : If two straight lines intersect the x-
axis at A and B and y-axis at C and D such that
OA.OB = OC.OD, O being origin then points A, B,
C, D are concyclic.
Reason (R) : If a secant through a point P intersects
a circle at Q and R then PQ.PR is independent of the
direction of the secant.

13. Assertion (A) : The equation
(log x)
2
log x
3
+ 2 = 0 has only one solution.
Reason (R) : log x
2
= 2 log x if x > 0

each wrong answer.
It is given that A = (tan
1
x)
3
+ (cot
1
x)
3
, where
x > 0 & B = (cos
1
t)
2
+ (sin
1
t)
2
, where
t
(
2
1
, 0 & sin
1
x + cos
1
x =
2
for 1 x 1 &
tan
1
x + cot
1
x =
2
xR
14. The interval in which A lie is
(A)
|
|
.
|

2
,
8
3 3
(B)
|
|
.
|

8
,
32
3 3
(C)
|
|
.
|
\
|

5
,
10
3 3
(D) None

15. Maximum value of B is
(A)
8
2
(B)
16
2
(C)
4
2
(D) None

16. If least value of A is & max. value of B is then
cot
1

|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|

cot =
(A)
8
(B)
8

(C)
8
7
(D)
8
7

Consider lines
L
1
:
1
2 x
=
1
3 y
=
k
4 z
, L
2
:
2
1 x
=
2
4 y
=
1
5 z

17. A vector perpendicular to L
1
&L
2
and of length 3 2
is- (When k = 1)
(A) 3 i
3 j
(B) 2(3 i
+2 j
)
(C) 3 i
+4 j
+ 2 k
(D) 3 i
+ 4 k

18. Value of 'k' so that lines L
1
and L
2
are coplanar, is -
(A) 1 (B) 1/2 (C) 2 (D) 2

19. Equation of plane containing these lines is
(A) x y 2 = 0 (B) 2x y + 2 = 0
(C) x y + 7 = 0 (D) None of these

A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

20. Match the following
Consider a plane P = 0 on whom foot of
perpendicular from point (1, 1, 1) is (2, 3, 4).
Column-I Column-II
(A) sum of intercepts of P = 0 (P) 52/7
on coordinate axis is
(B) perpendicular distance of (Q) 110/3
(0, 0, 0) from plane is then
2
is
(C) A line through (0, 0, 0) and (R) 120
perpendicular to plane is

a
x
=
b
y
=
c
z
then a + b+ c may be
(D) Radius of circle obtained by (S) 200/7
plane 'P' and sphere x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2

= 36 is 'r' then r
2
is equal to
Column-I Column-II
(A) Distance of 3x + 4y 5 = 0 (P)1
from (1, 1) is
(B) Area of formed by x + y = 2 (Q) 4/3
with co-ordinate axis is
(C) Circumcentre of formed by (R) 2/5
3x + 4y 7 = 0 and axis is
(h, k) then h + k is
(D) Two sides of are x + y = 1 (S) 49/24
and 2x + y + 4 = 0. If circumcentre
is (2, 1) then slope of third side is

Column-I Column-II
(A) Find the number of 6 digit (P) 1
natural numbers, where each
digit appears at least twice
(B) In how many ways can five (Q) 677
different books be tied up in
three bundles
(C) How many non-empty (R) 11754
collections are possible by
using 5P's and 6 Q's
(D) How many students do you (S) 25
need in a school to guarantee
that there are atleast 2 students,
who have the same 1st two
initials in their 1st names

PHYSICS

1. The spectrum of hydrogen atom has many lines
although hydrogen atom contain only one electron
why ?

2. What happens to the frequency when light passes
from one medium to another.

3. What are coherent sources of light
4. If the intensity of the incident radiation on a metal is
doubled, what happens to the kinetic energy of the
emitted photoelectrons.

5. Prove mathematically that the average power over a
complete cycle of alternating current through an
ideal inductor is zero.

6. Figure shows a branch of a circuit. Find out the value
of potential difference between A and B.

A
1A
2
+

1
B
2V

7. Write the following radiations in an ascending order
in respect of their frequencies :
Xrays, microwaves, ultraviolet rays, radiowaves

8. In a closed surface incoming flux and outgoing flux
is 5 10
5
and 4 10
5
V-m respectively then find out
the charge enclosed by surface.

9. A freshly prepared radioactive substance of half life
2 hours emits radiation of intensity which is 64 times
the permissible safe level. Find the minimum time
after which it would possible to work with this
source safely.

10. Why does the conductivity of a semiconductor change
with the rise in temperature.
11. In optical fiber refractive index of cladding is less
than core. Why ?

12. Where should an object be placed from a convex lens
to from an image of the same size ? Can it happen in
the case of a concave lens ?

13. A transmitting antenna at the top of tower has a
height of 36 m and the height of the receiving
antenna is 49 m. What is the maximum distance
between them for satisfactory communication in the
LOS mode ?
(Radius of earth = 6400 km)

General Instructions : Physics & Chemistry
Time given for each subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 70 for each.
All questions are compulsory.
Marks for each question are indicated against it.
Question numbers 1 to 8 are very short-answer questions and carrying 1 mark each.
Question numbers 9 to 18 are short-answer questions, and carry 2 marks each.
Question numbers 19 to 27 are also short-answer questions, and carry 3 marks each.
Question numbers 28 to 30 are long-answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
Use of calculators is not permitted.

General Instructions : Mathematics
Time given to solve this subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 100.
All questions are compulsory.
The question paper consists of 29 questions divided into three sections A, B and C.
Section A comprises of 10 questions of one mark each.
Section B comprises of 12 questions of four marks each.
Section C comprises of 7 questions of six marks each.
All question in Section A are to be answered in one word, one sentence or as per the exact requirement of the question.
There is no overall choice. However, internal choice has been provided in 4 questions of four marks each and
2 question of six marks each. You have to attempt only one of the alternatives in all such questions.
Use of calculators is not permitted.
MOCK TEST PAPER-3
CBSE BOARD PATTERN

CLASS # XII
SUBJECT : PHYSICS , CHEMISTRY & MATHEMATICS
Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n same i ssue
14. Derive the expression for the capacitance of a
parallel plate capacitor, having two identical plates
each of area A and separated by a distance d, when
the space between the plates is filled by a dielectric
medium.

15. In a meter bridge shown in circuit diagram, the
balance point is found to be at 40 cm from the
end A when resistor Y is of value 20 .
Calculate the shifting in of balancing point on the
same wire if X and Y are interchanged.
X Y
B
C
G
A
D
E

16. Two parallel wires of infinite length have linear
charge densities
1
and
2
coulomb/metre. Derive an
expression for force per unit length acting between
them.
17. A 10 F capacitor is charged by a 30 V d.c. supply
and then connected across an uncharged 50 F
capacitor. Calculate (i) the final potential difference
across the combination and (ii) the initial and final
energies. How will you account for the difference in
energy ?

18. Amplitude of electric field in an electromagnetic wave
is 310
6
V/m. Find amplitude of magnetic field.

19. Explain it
(i) work function
(ii) Threshold frequency
(iii) Threshold wave length
(iv) Stopping potential

20. Show that the energy of the first excited state of He
+

atom is equal to the energy of the ground state of
hydrogen atom

21. In a young's double slit experiment, the slits are
separated by 0.56 mm and the screen is placed 2.8 m
away. The distance between the central bright fringe
and the fifth bright fringe is measured to be 1.5 cm.
Determine the wavelength of light used in the
experiment.

22. A communication system having operating wavelength
in m can use only x% of its source frequency as its
channel bandwidth. The system is to be used for
transmitting TV signals requiring bandwidth of F Hz,
How many channels can this system transmit
simultaneously

23. The given figure shows a network of resistances R
1
,
R
2
, R
3
and R
4
. Using Kirchhoff's laws, establish the
balance condition for the network.
G
R
2

R
1
R
3 R
4

D
B
+

A C

24. Distinguish between resistance, reactance and
impedance for an a.c. circuit. Draw graph showing
variation for reactance of (i) a capacitor (ii) an
inductor with frequency of the circuit.

25. A 0.5 m long metal rod PQ completes the circuit as
shown. The area of the circuit is perpendicular to the
magnetic field of flux density 0.15 T. If the
resistance of the total circuit is 3 . Calculate the
force needed to move the rod in the direction as
indicated with speed 2 ms
1
.

v
Q
P

26. Explain the principle and working of cyclotron with
the help of a labelled diagram.

27. Using Gauss' theorem, deduce an expression for the
electric field intensity at any point due to a thin,
infinitely long wire of charge/length C/m.

28. What is diffraction ? write down its difference with
interference ? If single slit diffraction is obtained by
using light of wavelength 5000 and slit width 0.5
mm. Then calculate angular width of central
maxima.
OR
What is dispersion ? How the angular dispersion is
defined ? Which colours is deviated maximum by a
prism ? Calculate dispersive power of crown glass if
refractive indices for red, yellow and violet colours
are 1.5140, 1.5170 and 1.5318 respectively.

29. What is spectrum ? write down types of spectrum
?
OR
If electrons trans it from first excited state of
H-atom to ground state and emitted radiations
incidents over a metallic surface of threshold
wavelength 4000 , then what is the value of
maximum kinetic energy of electrons emitted from
this surface ?
30. With the help of a neat and labelled diagram, explain
the underlying principle and working of a moving
coil galvanometer. What is the function of:
(i) uniform radial field
(ii) soft iron core in such a device ?
OR
Derive a mathematical expression for the force per
unit length experienced by each of the two long
current carrying conductors placed parallel to each
other in air. Hence define one ampere of current.
Explain why two parallel straight conductors carrying
current in the opposite direction kept near each other in
air repel ?

CHEMISTRY

1. Complete the following reactions :
CH
3
CH
2
CH=CH
2
+ HCl .

2. Arrange the following compounds in an increasing
order of their acid strengths :
(i) Br
2
CH
2
CH
2
COOH
(ii) Cl

CH

CH
2
COOH
|
Cl

(iii) F CH
2
CH
2
COOH
(iv) CH
2
CH
2
COOH
|
I

3. How will you distinguish between propanal &
propanone.
4. What are amino acid. Write zwitterionic structure of
alanine.

5. What happen when an electric field is applied to a
colloidal solution ?

6. Explain the Frenkel defect with suitable example.

7. Why is the elevation in b.p. of water different in the
following solutions ?
(i) 0.1 molar NaCl solution.
(ii) 0.1 molar sugar solution.

8. Write a IUPAC name of following :

Br
CH
3
CH C C OCH
3
O

O

9. Complete the following reaction sequense :
(i) C
6
H
5
N
2
Cl + Cu
2
Cl
2

(ii) HC CH
4 2
4
SO H
SO Hg

..................
10. For the following conversion reactions write the
chemical equations :
(i) Ethyl isocyanide to ethylamine
(ii) Aniline to N-Phenylethanamide
11. Write the structural formulae of A, B, C and D in the
following sequence of reaction :

A + CH
3
MgBr
H2O
CH
3
CH
2
CH CH
3
OH
H2O
H2SO4
B
Br2
C
Alc. KOH
D

12. Give the structural formulae and names of the
products of the following reactions :
(i) Chloroform is heated with aniline in presence of
alc. KOH.
(ii) Phenol is treated with an excess of aqueous
bromine.
13. For a I
st
order chemical reaction rate constant is
2.303 sec
1
. Determine the time required for 90%
completion of a chemical reaction

14. The vapour pressure of pure liquid A and B are 450
mm Hg and 700 mm Hg at 350 K respectively. Find
the mole fractions of the components if total vapour
pressure is 600 mm Hg.

15. Calculate the mass of a nonvolatile solute (molecular
mass 40) which should be dissolved in 114 g octane
to reduce its vaour pressure to 80%.
16. Describe the following with an example for each :
(i) Aldol condensation
(ii) Trans-esterification

17. Write reactions starting conditions for the following
conversions :
(i) Benzene to Acetophenone
(ii) Ethanal to Propanone

18. (a) Compare the magnetic moments of the following
Cr
+3
, V
+3
, Fe
+3

(b) Which of the following is coloured
CuSO
4
(aq), [Sc(H
2
O)
6
]
+3
, ZnCl
2

19. How are the following conversions carried out ?
(Write reactions only)
(i) 1-bromopropane to 2-bromopropane
(ii) Propanone to iodoform
(iii) Phenol to salicylic acid
20. Describe in brief the structure of DNA.

21. Write the structure of polymers :
(a) PVC (b) PMMA (C) PTFE

22. What are antacids. Explain with example

23. What is adsorption ? How does adsorption of a gas
on a solid surface vary with
(a) temperature and (b) Pressure ?
Illustrate with the help of appropriate graphs.
24. Explain the following terms with suitable examples :
(i) Schottky defect, (ii) Interstitials
(iii) F-centres.
25. A first order reaction is 20% complete in 10 minutes.
Calculate (i) k of the reaction and (ii) time taken for
the reaction to go upto 75% completion.
26. (a) Name the lanthanoide element which forms
tetrapositive ions in aqueous solution.
(b) Why do Zr and Hf exhibit similar properties ?
(c) Colour of a solution of K
2
Cr
2
O
7
depends on pH
of the solution. Why ?
27. (a) Write preparation of K
2
Cr
2
O
7
. Give reactions.
(b) Complete reactions :
K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ H
2
SO
4
+ KI
KMnO
4
+ H
2
SO
4
+ H
2
S

28. (a) Describe the preparation of acetic acid from
acetylene.
(b) How can the following be obtained from acetic
acid
(i) Acetone
(ii)Acetaldehyde
(c) In what way can acetic acid be distinguished
from acetone ?
(d) Why do carboxylic acids not give the
characteristic reactions of a carbonyl group ?
OR
(a) How would you account for the following :
(i) Aldehydes are more reactive than ketones
towards nucleophiles.
(ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones
are lower than of the corresponding acids
(iii) The aldehydes and ketones undergo a
number of addition reactions.
(b) Give chemical tests to distinguish between :
(i) Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde
(ii) Propanone and propanol

29. (a) Calculate the EMF of the cell Mg (s)/Mg
2+

(0.2 M) || Ag
+
(1 10
3
M) / Ag ; Mg / Mg
2
E
+
=
2.37 V, Ag / Ag E
+
= + 0.80 V. What will be the

effect on EMF if concentration of Mg
2+
ion is
decreased to 0.1 M ?
(b) (i) Arrange the following metals in the order in
which they displace each other from the
solution of their salts.
(ii) Given the standard electrode potentials ;
K
+
/ K = 2.93 V, Ag
+
/ Ag = 0.80 V,
Hg
2+
/ Hg = + 0.79 V, Mg
2+
/ Mg = 2.37 V,
Cr
3+
/ Cr = 0.74 V
Arrange these metals in their increasing order
of reducing power.
30. Arrange the following in order of the property
mentioned and give reason.
(i) F
2
, Cl
2
, Br
2
, I
2
(Bond energy)
(ii) HCl, HF, HI, HBr (acidic strength)
(iii) PH
3
, NH
3
, SbH
3
, AsH
3
(basic strength)
(iv) H
2
O, H
2
S, H
2
Se, H
2
Te (boiling point)
(v) HOCl, HClO
2
, HClO
3
, HClO
4
(acidic strength)

MATHEMATICS

Section A

1. From the differential equation representing the
family of curves y = A cos (x + B), where A and B
are parameter.

2. Evaluate :
+ dx x 2 / sin 1 .

3. If
a = k j i
+ and
b = k
3 i
, find
|
b 2
a |.

4. If
a = k
3 j
2 i
+ ;
b = k j i
3 + , show that
(
a +
b ) is perpendicular to (
b ).

5. Show that the four points whose position vectors are
j i
6 , k j i
29
16 , k j
3 and
k j i
10
2 + + are coplanar.

6. Write the following function in the simplest form
tan
1
2 2
x a
x
.

7. Find gof : If f (x) = |x| and g(x) = |5x 2|.

8. If matrix A has order 3 4, matrix B has order
4 2 and matrix C has order 2 3, Find order of
(A.B.C).

9. If A =
(
+
0 3 2
2 0
x
x
is skew symmetric,
find x.

10. Find value of x such that
1 5
4 2
=
x
x
6
4 2
.

Section B

11. The odds against a certain event are 5 to 2 and the
odds in favour of another independent event are 6 to
5. Find the chance that at least one of the events will
happen.
OR
In two successive throws of a pair of dice, determine
the probability of getting a total of 8, each time.

12. Solve (1 + x
2
)
dx
dy
+2xy 4x
2
= 0.

13. Evaluate :
(
(
+
+
dx
x
x
e
x
2
) 2 (
1
.
OR
Evaluate

dx
x x
x
4 2
1
2

14. Evaluate :
+ ) cos sin 2 )( cos 2 (sin x x x x

dx
.

15. The position vectors of two points A and B are
k j i
2

3 + + and k j i
respectively. Find the

vector equation of the plane passing through B and
perpendicular to the vector AB.

16. If
a = k j i

3
+ ,
b = k j i

+ and
c = k j i

2 + , verify that
a (
c ) =
(
a .
c )
b (
a .
b )
c .

17. Find the equation of tangent to curve y = 2 3x .
Which is parallel to line 4x 2y + 5 = 0.

18. If y =
.....
x
x
x , then show that

dx
dy
=
) log 2 (
2
x y x
y
.
OR
Differentiate tan
1

(
(
+ +
+
2 2
2 2
1 1
1 1
x x
x x
w.r.t,cos
1
x
2

19. If x
y
= e
xy
, then prove that

dx
dy
=
2
) log 1 (
log
x
x
+

20. If f (x) =
x
x
2 cot
4
tan |
.
|
\
|
, x /4, find the value which
can be assigned to f (x), at x = /4 so that f (x)
becomes continuous every where in [0, /2].

21. Find the value of parameter for which
f (x) = 1 + x, 0 is the inverse of itself.

22. Use properties of determinants proof that
4 8 8 10
4 4 5
+ +
+
+
x x y x
x x y x
x x y x
= x
3
.
OR
Show that
xy z
zx y
yz x
1
1
1
=
2
2
2
1
1
1
z z
y y
x x

and hence factorize.

Section C

23. One bag contains five white and four black ball.
Another bag contains seven white and nine black
balls. A ball is transferred from the first bag to the
second and then a ball is drawn from the second.
Find the probability that the ball drawn is white.

24. Find the area of the region bounded by x
2
+ y
2
= 1 and
(x 1)
2
+ y
2
= 1.

25. Evaluate : dx
e e
e
x x
x
+
0
cos cos
cos
.
Or
Evaluate : dx
x
x
+
4 /
4 /
2 cos 2
4 /
.

26. Find the shortest distance between the following
lines :
r = (1 t) i
+ (t 2) j
+ (3 2t) k
and
r = (s + 1) i
+ (2s 1) j
(2s + 1) k
.

27. A farmer has a supply of chemical fertilizer of type A
which contains 10% nitrogen and 6% phosphoric acid
and of type B which contains 5% of nitrogen and 10%
of phosphoric acid. After soil testing it is found that at
least 7 kg of nitrogen and the same quantity of
phosphoric acid is required for a good crop. the
fertilizer of type A costs Rs. 5.00 per kg and the type
B costs Rs. 8.00 per kg. Using linear programming
find how many kgs of each type of the fertilizer
should be bought to meet the requirement and the cost
be minimum. Solve the problem graphically.
OR
A furniture dealer deals only in two items-tables and
chairs. He has Rs.10,000 to invest and a space to
store at most 60 pieces. A table costs him Rs. 500
and a chair Rs.200. He can sell a table at a profit of
Rs.50 and a chair at a profit of Rs.15. Assume that
he can sell all items that he buys. Using linear
programming formulate the problem for maximum
profit and solve it graphically.

28. A wire of length 36 m is to be cut into two pieces.
One of the pieces is to be made into a square and
other into a circle. What should be lengths of two
pieces, so that combined area of the squared and
circle is minimum.

29. Solve the system of equation by using matrix
method.

x
2
+
y
3
+
z
10
= 4 ;
x
4

y
6
+
z
5
= 1 ;

x
6
+
y
9

z
20
= 2

Brain Teaser

Pears - There are a few trees in a garden. On one of
them, a pear tree, there are pears (quite logical). But
after a strong wind blew, there were neither pears on
the tree nor on the ground. How come?

Pears Solution At first, there were 2 pears on the
tree. After the wind blew, one pear fell on the ground.
So there where no pears on the tree and there were no
pears on the ground.Another possible solutions: The
wind blew so hard that the pears fell of the tree and
blew along the ground into the water or hovering in
the air in a tornado.

1. Emeralds have been produced synthetically in
labs since 1848 and can be virtually
indistinguishable from the genuine article.

2. In the last 200 years the use of metals has
increased as scientists have discovered new ones:
until the 17th Century only 12 metals were
known - there are now 86.

3. The only person to have an element named after
him while still alive was Glenn Seaborg, the
most prolific of all the element hunters.

4. Traffic lights with red and green gas lights were
first introduced in London in 1868.
Unfortunately, they exploded and killed a
policeman. The first successful system was
installed in Cleveland, Ohio in 1914.

5. In 1998, design student Damini Kumar at South
Bank University patented a teapot with a special
grooved spout, which she claims virtually rules
out dribbling.

6. Even though most items in the home today are
technologically up to date, most of us are still
using the standard light bulb designed in 1928!

7. A chest x-ray is comprised of 90,000 to 130,000
electron volts.

8. The strength of early lasers was measured in
Gillettes, the number of blue razor blades a given
beam could puncture.

9. The first commercial radio station in the United
States, KDKA Pittsburgh, began broadcasting in
November 1920.

10. A British rocket attack on US soldiers is
celebrated in the lyrics of the US National
Anthem.

11. Until the late 1800s, it was forbidden for women
in the United States to obtain a patent, so if a
woman had invented something she would file
for a patent under her husband or father's name.
For this reason, the number of early female
inventors remains a mystery.

12. Milt Garland, a 102 year old engineer, invented a
technology that forms ice on the exterior of a
casing instead of inside it, which is used to create
indoor ice rinks.

PHYSICS

1. Refractive index is maximum for violet and
minimum for red colour

2. Path difference between two waves should be odd
multiple of /2 or phase difference between two
waves should be odd multiple of .
3.
10
34
10 5000
10 6 . 6 h
P
= = 1.32 10
27
kg-m/s

4. R = R
0
A
1/3
R A
1/3

2
1
R
R
=
3
1
2
1
A
A
|
|
.
|
\
|

2
R
R
=
3 / 1
27
8
|
.
|
\
|
=
3
2

R
2
=
2
R 3

5. It should be very high i.e. in KHz to GHz

6.
=
c
v ; v
2
< v
3
<

v
1

7. Resistivity or specific resistance of a material is
defined as the resistance offered by a wire made by
that material having unit area of cross-section and
unit length.

8. V =
q
W
=
7
5
10 2 . 3
10 6 . 1
= 50 volt

9. Objective lens must have greater focal length than
eye-piece because magnifying power of lens
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
e
0
P
f
f
M increases in this case.

10. Conditions of interference
(i) waves must travel in the same medium in the
same direction.
(ii) Their frequencies and wavelengths must be
same
(iii) Their plane of polarisation must be same
(iv) Their must be maintained a constant phase
difference between the waves.

11. Ionisation energy:- Minimum energy required to
remove electron from its ground state.
Excitation energy:- Energy required to transit an
electron to one of its excited state from ground state
KE =
r 2
KZe
2
; U =
r
KZe
2

KE 2 U =

12. E
max.
= 12V; E
min.
= 4V
M
a
=
2
1
4 12
4 12
E E
E E
min max
min max
=
+
=
+

m
a
in percentage =
2
1
100 = 50%

13. Modulating signal being of low frequency cannot
travel to large distance so it is modulated with high
frequency carrier. Frequency modulation is virtually
free from noise where as amplitude modulation
suffers from noise pollution.

14. Semiconductor atoms are tetravalent. The form
covalent bonds by sharing their electrons with the
neighboring atoms. When donor impurity of valency
S is doped, the donor atoms takes the place of a
semiconductor atom in the crystal lattice. Donor
atoms forms covalent bond by sharing its four
electrons whereas the fifth electron of donor atom is
so loosely attached to the atom such that it behaves
as a free electron at room temperature.

15. (i) width of depletion layer of zener diode
becomes very small due to heavy doping of
p and n regions.
(ii) The field across depletion layer becomes very
high |
.
|
\
|
=
d
V
E Q

16. Let at any instant charge on the capacitor is q, then
p.d. V =
C
q

Then work done to put additional charge dq is
dW = (dq) V = |
.
|
\
|
C
q
dq
Total work done to give charge Q is
W =
|
.
|
\
|
Q
0
dq
C
q
=
C 2
Q
2
=
2
1
CV
2
(Q Q = CV)
MOCK TEST-2 (SOLUTION)

MOCK TEST 2 PUBLISHED IN JANUARY ISSUE
This work done is stored inside the capacitor as P.E.

2
CV
2
1
W U = =

17. (i) A galvanometer can be converted into ammeter
by connecting a low resistance called shunt parallel
to the galvanometer coil.
(ii) A galvanometer can be converted into voltmeter
by connecting a large resistance in series with the
galvanometer coil.

18. (i) Electromagnetic waves are produced by
accelerated charge.
(ii) The velocity of electromagnetic wave in free
space is equal to the velocity of light in free space.
(iii) It is transverse in nature.

19. = 2
= ?
f
o
= 20 cm
f
e
= 4 cm
M
P
=
and M
P
=
e
o
f
f

e
o
f
f
=
=
|
|
.
|
\
|
e
o
f
f

= |
.
|
\
|
4
20
2 = 10

20.
mqV 2
h
=
for proton

meV 2
h
= (i)
For -particle
=
' eV 2 m 4 2
h

(ii)
By (i) and (ii)
2meV = 2 4m 2eV'
8 / V ' V =

21.

a
b
c
d
e
Fe 56
a
2
He
4
b
4
Be
8
c
6
C
12
d
8
O
16
e
10
Ne
20
BE/A
A

22. 2 is NAND and 1 is OR gate
A B Y' Y
0 1 1 0

23. R = (AB 10
c
5)%
Yellow A = 4
Violet B = 7
Brown C = 1
R = (47 10 5)%
= (470 5)%

24. (i) To make strong electromagnet
(ii) To make high speed computers

25. tan =
H
V
B
B

B
V
= B
H
tan = 0.4 10
4
tan60 = 0.69 10
4
T and
B
H
= B
e
cos
B
e
=
60 cos
10 4 . 0
cos
B
4
H
= 0.8 10
4
T

26. BiotSavarts law
This law is applicable to determine magnetic field
due to small current element. Magnetic field due to
small element
l d at point A is given as

r
A
l d
l d
i

3
0
r
) r d (
4
i
dB

=
l

or
2
0
r
sin id
4
dB
=
l

where
0
Permeability of free space,
between
l d and
r .

27. (i) On increasing distance between the coils, flux
linked decreases, hence mutual inductance decreases

(ii) Q M =
l
A N N
2 1 0

on increasing no. of turns, M increases
(iii) when iron sheet (
r
) is inserted
Then M =
l
A N N
2 1 r 0

M increased, because for iron
r
> > 1

28 Parallel light rays incidenting over a lens converges
to a point (convex lens) or seems to diverge from the
point (concave lens) after refraction from lens. Then
this point is called principle focus of lens.
When lens is dipped into a liquid of refractive index
greater than lens material refractive index then
nature of lens gets changed.
Focal length of lens is maximum for red and
minimum for violet colour.

1
= 1
1
= 1

+
I
II

R
1
= + 20; R
2
;
f
1
= (
2
1) |
.
|
\
|
+
1
20
1

f
1
= (2 1) |
.
|
\
|
1
20
1

cm 20 f + =

OR

i
M
r

u
P
R
v
2
I C
O
1

By snell's law
m
1
sin i =
2
sin r
But for small aperture MP;
1
i =
2
r (i)
In OCM; i = +
and In ICM; = r + r = .
By (i)
1
( + ) =
2
( )
1
(
+
PC
MP
OP
MP
=
2
(
PI
MP
PC
MP

1

(
+
+
R
1
u
1
=
2
(
+ v
1
R
1

v R R u
2 2 1 1

R u v
1 2 1 2

=

29. Principal of van deGraff Generator : (i) Let a
small charged conducting shell of radius
r be located inside a larger charged conducting shell
of radius R. If they are connected with a conductor,
then charge q from the small shell will move to the
outer surface of bigger shell irrespection of its own
charge Q.
Here potential difference
r
Q
q
R

= V
(r)
V
(R)

=
0
4
q
|
.
|
\
|
R
1
r
1

In this way, the potential of the outer shell increases
considerably.
(ii) Sharp pointed surfaces have larger charge
densities, so these can be used to set up discharging
action.

Conducting
Shell
H
v
R
Insulating
Column
Target
Grounded
Steal
Tank
C
1
, C
2

metal
Comb

C
2
S

Working :Let spray comb C
1
be charged to a high +ve
potential which spray +ve charge to the belt which in
turn becomes positively charged. Since belt is
moving up, so it carries this positive charge upward.
Opposite charge appears on the teeth of collecting
comb C
2
by induction from the belt. As a result of
this, positive charge appears on the outer surface of
shell S. As the belt is
moving continuously, so the charge on the shell S
increase continuously. Consequently, the potential
of the shell (S) rises, to a very high value.
Now the charged particles at the top of the tub (T)
are very high potential with respect to the lower end
of the tube which is earthed. Thus these particles get
accelerated downward and hit the target emerging
from the tube.
Use : It can be used to accelerate particles which are
used in nuclear physics for collision experiments.

Or
(i) Intensity of the Electric field at a point on the
Axis of a Diople :

A
O
q
+q
l
l
r
B
E2 E1 P

The intensities E
1
and E
2
are along the same line in
opposite directions. Therefore, the resultant intensity
E at the point P will be equal to their difference and
in the direction BP (since E
1
> E
2
). That is,
E = E
1
E
2

=
K 4
1
0
2
) r (
q
l

K 4
1
0
2
) r (
q
l +

=
K 4
q
0
+
2 2
) r (
1
) r (
1
l l

=
K 4
q
0
(
(
+
2 2 2
2 2
) r (
) r ( ) r (
l
l l

=
K 4
q
0
2 2 2
) r (
r 4
l
l

=
K 4
1
0
2 2 2
) r (
r ) q 2 ( 2
l
l

But 2ql = p (electric dipole moment).
E =
K 4
1
0

2 2 2
) r (
r p 2
l

If l is very small compared to r (l << r), then l
2
may
be neglected in comparison to r
2
. Then the electric
intensity at the point P due to the dipole is given by
E =
K 4
1
0
4
r
r p 2
=
K 4
1
0

3
r
p 2
N/C.
For vacuum (or air) K = 1.

1
3
0
NC
r
p 2
4
1
E
= ..(i)
Intensity of the Electric Field at a point on the
Equatorial Line of a Dipole.

A

r
P
B
O
l l
q +q

E P
E1
E2

E2
P

E
1
sin
E
2
sin
E1 cos +
E2 cos
E2

E
1
=
K 4
1
0

) r (
q
2 2
l +

(in the direction BP) and E
2
=

K 4
1
0

) r (
q
2 2
l +

(in the direction PA)
The magnitude of E
1
and E
2
are equal (but directions
are different). On resolving E
1
and E
2
into two
components parallel and perpendicular to AB, the
components perpendicular to AB
(E
1
sin and E
2
sin ) cancel each other (because
they are equal and opposite) while the components
parallel to AB (E
1
cos and E
2
cos ), being in the
same direction ,add up. Hence the resultant intensity
of electric field at the point P is
E = E
1
cos + E
2
cos
=
K 4
1
0
) r (
q
2 2
l +
cos +
K 4
1
0
) r (
q
2 2
l +
cos
=
K 4
1
0
) r (
q
2 2
l +
2 cos
But from fig. cos =
PB
OB
=
2 / 1 2 2
) OB OP (
OB
+

=
2 / 1 2 2
) r ( l
l
+
.
E =
K 4
1
0
) r (
q
2 2
l +

2 / 1 2 2
) r (
2
l
l
+

=
K 4
1
0

2 / 3 2 2
) r (
q 2
l
l
+
.
But 2ql = p (moment of electric dipole).
E =
K 4
1
0
2 / 3 2 2
) r (
p
l +
.
If l is very small as compared to r ( l < < r), then l
2

can be neglected in comparison to r
2
. Then the
electric intensity at the point P due to the dipole is
E =
K 4
1
0

2 / 3 2
) r (
p
=
K 4
1
0

3
r
p
N/C.
For vacuum (or air) K = 1
. NC
r
p
4
1
1
3
0
..(ii)
The direction of the electric field E is parallel to the
axis of the dipole from the positive charge towards
the negative charge.
Comparing eq. (i) and (ii) we see that for a short
dipole the intensity of the electric field on an axial
point is twice the intensity at the same distance on
the equatorial line.
(ii) W = U
f
U
i
=PE (1 cos ) = PE (1 cos 180)
= PE (1 + 1) = 2 PE

30.

A
t

E

Or
Let a source of alternating e.m.f. be connected to a
circuit containing a pure inductance only, Fig.
Suppose the alternating e.m.f. supplied is
represented by
t sin E E
0
=
L

If dI/dt is the rate of change of current through L at
any instant, then induced e.m.f. in the inductor at the
same instant is = L dI/dt . The negative sign
indicated that induced e.m.f. opposes the change of
current. To maintain the flow of current, the applied
voltage must be equal and opposite to the induced
voltage
i.e. E = |
.
|
\
|
dt
dI
L = E
o
sin t
or dI =
L
E
0
sin t dt
Integrating both sides, we get
I =
L
E
0
dt t sin
=
L
E
0
|
.
|
\
|
t cos
=
L
E
0
cos t
=
L
E
0
sin |
.
|
\
|
t
2

or I =
L
E
0
sin (t /2) (i)

The current will be maximum i.e. I = I
0
, when sin
(t /2) = maximum = 1.
From (i), I
0
=
L
E
0
1 (ii)
Putting in (i), we get
) 2 / t sin( I I
0
=
This is the form of alternating current developed.

CHEMISTRY

1
acid oic tan Bu
COOH CH CH CH
al tan Bu
CHO CH CH CH
2 2 3
) reagent ' Tollens (
AgNO Ammonical
2 2 3
3

2. 3-Amino-2-chloro butanamide

3. These are partly produced in body.
Ex. Histidine and arginine
4. yes, because O
2
is paramagnetic

5. In B.C.C no. of effective atoms are = 2
In F.C.C no. of effective atoms are = 4

6. In lyophillic colloids affinity is present between
dispersed phase and dispersion medium and
therefore it is more stable.
7. r = k [NO]
2
[H
2
]

8. 6-Amino 3-chloro 4-hydroxy hexanamide

9. (i) Aldol condensation : Two molecules of an
aldehyde or a ketone having at least one -hydrogen
atom, condense in the presence of a dilute alkali to
give -hydroxy aldehyde or -hydroxy ketone.

CH
3
C + HCH
2
CHO
O
H
Dil. NaOH

CH
3
CCH
2
CHO
OH
H
Ethanal Ethanal Aldol

(ii) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis : Phthalimide on
treatment with ethanoic KOH gives potassium
phthalimide which on heating with a suitable alkyl halide
gives N-substituted phthalimides. These upon hydrolysis
with dil HCl under pressure give primary amines.

CO
H
2
O
CO
NH + KOH (alc)
CO

CO

N
H
+
Pot. Phthalimide
Phthalimide
C
2
H
5
I,
KI
CO
CO
NC
2
H
5
N-Ethylphthalimide

H
+
/ H
2
O
COOH
COOH
C
2
H
5
NH
2
+

Phthalic acid

Ethylamide

10.

COCH3
Benzene

(i)
CH3COCl + Anhyd. AlCl3
F.C.acylation
Acetophenone

CH
3
C = O

Ethanal
(ii)

H

CH3MgBr
Dry ether
CH
3
C OMgBr
H

CH
3
H
+
/H2O
CH
3
C OH
H

CH
3
Cu
573 K
CH
3
C = O + H
2
CH
3
Propanone

11. The compound is CH
3
CH
2
CHO, Its IUPAC name is
propanal. The isomer is CH
3
COCH
3
, acetone.

12. (i) Treat the compound with Lucas reagent (conc.
HCl + anhy. ZnCl
2
) 2-propanol gives turbidity in 5
min whereas ethanol gives no turbidity at room
temperature
CH
3
CH
2
OH + HCl
2
ZnCl
No reaction

CH
3
CHCH
3
+ HCl

OH

CH
3
CHCH
3
+ H
2
O
Cl

ZnCl2
Turbidity appears
in 5 min

(ii) Acetaldehyde reduces Tollen's reagent to
silver mirror but acetone does not.
CH
3
CHO + 2[Ag(NH
3
)
2
]
+
+ OH

CH
3
COO + 2H
2
O + 2Ag + 4NH
3
CH
3
COCH
3

reagent s ' Tollen
No action

Sol.3 (a) Where concentration of reactant become unity or
one litre rate of reaction is called as rate constant.
(b) The reaction which has order greater than one
but follows the kinetics of I
st
order reaction is called
pseudo unimolecular reaction.
CH
3
COOC
2
H
5
+ H
2
O(excesss)
HCl

CH
3
COOH + C
2
H
5
OH

velocit
y = K[CH
3
COOC
2
H
5
]

14. (a) When NaCl is added neutralization of charge
takes place which results in precipitation of
colloidal solution and coagulation takes place.

(b) Due to scattering of blue wavelength of light it
makes image in our eye and sky appears blue.
15. (i) The reaction involved is
2H
2
O O
2
+ 4H
+
+ 4e

2 mol H
2
O required 4F charge
1 mol H
2
O required 2F charge
(ii) 2FeO + H
2
O Fe
2
O
3
+ 2n
+
+ 2e

2 mol 2F
1 mol 1F

16. (i) Fluorine (ii) Iodine

17. (i) Transition metals have unpaired e

(ii) Transition metals and compounds have
unpaired e

18.

H C = O + CH
3
CH
2
MgBr

(i)
|
H

Methanal Grignard
reagent

Dry ether
H C OMgBr

CH
2
CH
3
H

H
2
O/H
+

CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
OH + Mg

OH
Br

Propan-1-ol

KMnO
4
/H
+

(ii)
CH
2
OH

Benzyl alcohol

COOH

Benzoic alcohol

19.

2CH
3
CHI + 2Na

(i)
|
CH
3
Dry ether

CH
3
CH CH CH
3
+ 2NaI
|
CH
3
|
CH
3
2,3-Dimethyl butane

(CH
3
)
2
CO

(ii)
LiAIH
4
CH
3
CHCH
3
|
OH

2-Propanol


OH

(iii)
COOH

+

CH
3
CO

CH
3
CO

O

OCOCH
3
COOH

+ CH
3
COOH

Aspirin

20. (a) CH
2
CH=CH
2
CHCHCH
2
C
6
H
5
H

(b)

CH
2
C
C
6
H
5
H
H

(c) CH
2
CH
CN

H

21. Antibiotics are natural chemicals which kill/stop the
growth
of bacteria
Types
(A) Bactericidal : Ex- penicillin, afloxacin
(B) Bacteriostatic: Ex tetracycline, chloremphenicol

22. Vitamins are organic compounds required in small
quantity for normal functioning of body
vitamin (C) is ascorbic acid. Deficiency- scurvy
vitamin B
1
is thiamine acid. Deficiency beri-beri
vitamin (B
12
) is cyanocobalamine. Deficiency anaemia

23 (i)
Rate of Reaction Rate constant of Reaction
1. It is the speed at
which the reactants
are converted into
the products at any
moment of time
2. It depends upon the
concentration of
reactants species at
that moment of
time.

3. It generally
decreases with
progress of the
reaction
1. It is the constant of
proportionality in the rate
law equation

2. It refers to the rate of the
reaction at the
specific point when
concentration of every
reacting species is unity
3. It is constant and does not
depend on the progress of
the reaction
(ii)
Molecularity Order
1. It is number of
reacting species
1. It is the sum of
powers of
undergoing
simultaneous
collisions in the
reaction.

2. It is a theoretical
concept.

3. It can have integral
value only.

4. It cannot be zero.

5. It does not tell us
anything about the
mechanism of the
reaction.
concentration terms
in the rate law
expression

2. It is determined
experimentally.

3. It can have even
zero value.

4. It can also have
fractional values.

5. It tells us about the
slowest step in the
mechanismand hence
gives some clue about
mechanism of the
reaction.

24. (a) The conductivity of all the ions of the solution
which is kept between electrodes 1 cm apart and area
of the electrodes 1 cm
2
.
Molar conductivity can be defined as conductance of
all the ions present in the solution which contain 1
mol electrolyte in certain volume and solution is
kept between electrodes 1 cm apart and area of the
electrodes such that whole solution is present
between them.
(b) In this cell Zn acts as anode and Ag as cathode

cell
E =
Ag
E
Zn
E
= 0.344 ( 0.76) = 1.104 V
G = n F E
cell
= 2 96500 1.104
= 2.13 10
5
J
25. (A) We know d =
A
N V
zM

7.86 =
23 3 8
10 02 . 6 ) 10 68 . 2 (
56 Z

z
~
2 i.e. B.C.C. structure

(B) Total no. of atoms surrounding a particular atom
in crystal structure is called coordination number.
(i) In C.C.P C.No. 12 ;
(ii) In B.C.C C.No. 8
26. (a)
27
Co
+3
= [Ar]
3d 4s 4p
d
2
sp
3

Octahedral geometry

NH
3

NH
3

Co
+3

NH
3

NH
3

NH
3

NH
3

No unpaired e
therefore diamagnetic
(b)
28
Ni
+2
= [Ar]
3d 4s 4p
dsp
2

CN

Ni
+2

CN

CN

CN

Square planar
No unpaired e
Diamagnetic in nature
(c)
28
Ni = [Ar]
3d 4s 4p
sp
3

Ni
CO
CO
CO
CO

Tetrahedral geometry
No unpaired e
Diamagnetic in nature

27. (a) (i) K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ 7H
2
SO
4
+ 6KI
Cr
2
(SO
4
)
3
+ K
2
SO
4
+ 7H
2
O + 3I
2

(ii) 6 KMnO
4
+ 6 KOH + KI
6K
2
MnO
4
+ 3H
2
O + KIO
3

(b) Lanthanoids have almost similar properties.

28. (a) According to Henry's law mole fraction of a gas
is directly proportional to the pressure at which gas
is disolved
p = k
H
x
App. (1) Dissolution of gases in cold drinks
(2) Dissolution of O
2
in haemoglobin
(b) = CRT
=
180
8 . 1

10
1000
0.0821 298 = 2.446 atm
T
f
= K
f
m = 1.86 0.1 = 0.186
T = 0.186C

29. (a) Acetylene is first oxidized with 40% H
2
SO
4
in
the presence of HgSO
4
HCC H + H
2
O
4
4 2
HgSO % 1
SO H %, 40
CH
3
CHO
Acetylene Acetaldehyde
Acetaldehyde is finally oxidized to acid with air in
the presence of manganous acetate catalyst

acid Acetic
3
Acetate
Manganous
de Acetaldehy
3
COOH CH ] O [ CHO CH +

(b) (i) CH
3
COOH
2
) OH ( Ca
(CH
3
COO)
2
Ca
Calcium acetate

Ca (HCOO)
2
3
de Acetaldehy
3
CaCO 2 CHO CH +
(ii) CH
3
COOH
2
) OH ( Ca
(CH
3
COO)
2
Ca
Acetic acid

3
Acetone
3 3
CaCO COCH CH +

(c) When heated with I
2
+ NaCO
3
Solution, acetone
gives yellow crystals of iodoform CH
3
COCH
3
+
3NaOI CH
3
I + CH
3
COONa
Acetone Yellow ppt.
(Iodoform)
Acetic acid does not give iodoform test.
(d) The carbonyl group in COOH is inert and does
not show nucleophilic addition reaction like
carbonyl compounds. It is due to resonance
stabilization of carboxylate ions.

R C = O
O
R C = O
O

Or
(a) (i) Due to smaller + I-effect of one alkyl group in
aldehydes as a compared to larger +I-effect of two
alkyl groups, the magnitude of positive charge on the
carbonyl carbon is more in aldehydes than in
ketones. As a result nucleophilic addition reaction
occur more readily in aldehyde than in ketones.

(ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones are
lower than corresponding acids and alcohols due to
absence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding .
(iii) Aldehydes and ketones undergo a number of
addition reactions as both possess the carbonyl
functional group which reacts a number of
nucleophiles such as HNC, NaHSO
3
, alcohols,
ammonia derivatives and Grignard reagents.
(b) (i) Distinction between acetaldehyde and
benzaldehyde: Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde can
be distinguish by Fehling solution.
Acetaldehyde give red coloured precipitate with
Fehling solution while benzaldehyde does not.
+ +
+
4 4 3 4 4 2 1
Solution Fehling
2
3
OH 5 2Cu CHO CH
O H O Cu COO CH
2
. ppt red
2 3
+ +

(ii) Distinction between Propanone and Propanol :
Propanone (CH
3
COCH
3
) and propanol
(CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
OH) can be distinguish by iodoform
test. Propanone when warmed with sodium
hypoiodide (NaOI) i.e. I
2
in NaOH, it gives yellow
ppt of idoform while propanol does not respond to
iodoform test.
+ NaOI 3 COCH CH
opanone Pr
3 3

NaOH 2 COONa CH I CH
3
ppt Yellow
3
+ +

30 (a) Mass of unit cell
23
10 023 . 6
M 2
=
Density = 7.2 g cm
3

= 288 pm = 288 10
10
cm
Now density =
Volume
Mass

7.2 =
3 10 23
) 10 288 ( 10 023 . 6
M 2

or M =
2
10 ) 288 ( 10 023 . 6 2 . 7
30 3 23

= 51.79 g mol
1
.

(b) Those compounds containing two or more
halogen atoms in their molecules are known as
Interhalogen compounds. Properties :
(i) They are covalent compounds and diamagnetic in
nature.
(ii) They are more reactive than the constituent
halogens. It is because A X bond is relatively
weaker than X X bond.
(iii) They are very good oxidizing agents.
Their melting point and boiling point are higher than
halogens and increases with increase in the
difference of electronegativity.

MATHEMATICS

Section A

1. Given line is
1
2
+ x
=
7
3 + y
=
2 / 3
3 z
.
Its direction ratios are 1, 7, 3/2
Or 2, 14, 3
Equation of line pasing through (1, 2, 3) is

2
2
+ x
=
14
2 y
=
3
3 z
.

2.
b +
c = i
+ 3 j
+ k
+ i
+ k
= 2i
+ 3 j
+ 2 k

Projection of
b +
c on
a =
| |
). (
a
a c b

+
.
=
2 2 2
) 1 ( ) 2 ( ) 1 (
)

2
).(
2 (
+ +
+ + + + k j i k j i
=
1 4 1
2 6 2
+ +
+ +
=
6
10

3. The vectors
a ,
b ,
c are coplanar if
a . [
c ] = 0

1 8
3 4 1
2 6 4
= 0
4 + (4 + 3) + 6 ( + 24) 2 (1 + 32) = 0
16 12 6 + 144 66 = 0
22 + 66 = 0
22 = 66 = 3

4. order = 2
Q The equation can't be expressed in polynomial
from
degree is not defined

5.
dx
x x x x
x x x x x x
+
+ +
2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 4 4
cos sin 2 ) cos (sin
) cos (sin ) cos (sin ) cos (sin

dx
x x
x x x
+
+
4 4
4 4
cos sin
) 2 cos ( ) 1 ( ) cos (sin

=
2
2 sin x
+ c

6. A =
(
5 4
3 2
A =
(
5 3
4 2

A A =
(

0 1
1 0

(A A) =

0 1
1 0
=
(
0 1
1 0

(A A) =
(

0 1
1 0

(A A) = (A A)
(A A) is skew symmetric matrix.

7. f(A) = A
2
5A + 7 I
2

=
(
2 1
1 3
.
(
2 1
1 3
5
(
2 1
1 3
+ 7.
(
1 0
0 1

=
(
3 5
5 8

(
10 5
5 15
+
(
7 0
0 7

=
(
0 0
0 0
= Null Matrix.

8. Area of = 0

2
1
1 2 6 4
1 2 1
1 2 2
k k
k k
k k

+
= 0
k . [2k 6 + 2k] (2 2k) [k + 1 + 4 + k]
+ 1 [(k + 1) (6 2k) 2k (4 k)] = 0
k [4k 6] (2 2k) (5) + [2k
2
8k + 6 + 8k + 2k
2
] = 0
4k
2
6k 10 + 10k + 4k
2
+ 6 = 0
8k
2
+ 4k 4 = 0
2k
2
+ k 1 = 0
(2k 1) (k + 1) = 0 k = 1/2, 1

9. y = f (e
x
)
y' = f '(e
x
). e
x

x x x x x
e e f e e e f y ). ( " . ). ( ' " + =

10. f (g(x)) = 1 ) (
2
= x x g
g(f (x)) = f (x)
2
1 = 1 ) (
2
x = x 1

Section B

11. A : 3 cards have the same number
n(A) = 13 C(4, 3) = 13
|
|
.
|
\
|
1 3
4
= 13 (4) = 52
n(S) = C(52, 3) =
49 3
52
= 22100
Required probability
= P(A) =
) (
) (
S n
A n
=
22100
52
=
5525
13
=
425
1

OR
Let E : Candidate Reaches late
A
1
= Candidate travels by bus
A
2
: Candidate travels by scooter
A
3
: Candidate travels by other modes of
transport
P(A
1
) =
10
3
, P(A
2
) =
10
1
, P(A
3
) =
5
3

P(E/A
1
) =
4
1
, P(E/A
2
) =
3
1
, P(E/A
3
) = 0
By Baye's Theorem
P(A
1
/E) =
) A / E ( P ) A ( P ) A / E ( P ) A ( P ) A / E ( P ) A ( P
) A / E ( P ) A ( P
3 3 2 2 1 1
1 1
+ +

=
0
30
1
40
3
4
1
10
3
+ +
=
13
9

12. Here, k j i A
3 + + =
; k j i B
3

+ + =

)

( )
3 ( k j i k j i b a + + + + + = +

= k j i
12
) 2 (
4 + + +
)
3

( )
3 ( k j i k j i b a + + + + =

= k j i
) 2 (
2 + +
Since
(
b a b a
we have

(
b a b a
= 0
0 ]
) 2 (
2 [ ]
12
) 2 (
4 [ = + + + + + k j i k j i
4 + (2 + ) (2 ) + 12 6 = 0
8 + 4
2
+ 72 = 0

2
= 84 21 2 =

13. Equation of plane passing through the inter sections
of planes
x + 2y + 32 4 = 0 and 2x + 4 z + 5 = 0
(x + 2y + 32 4) + (2x y z + 5) = 0 (i)
x + 2y + 32 4 + 2x + y z + 5 = 0
(1 + 2) x + (2 + ) y + (3 ) z 4 + 5 = 0
Since the plane (i) is perpendicular to
5x + 3y + 6z + 8 = 0
(1 + 2) 5+ (2 + ) 3 + ( 3 ) 6 = 0
5 + 10 + 6 + 3 + 18 6 = 0
7 + 29 = 0
7
29
=
required equation of plane is
(x + 2y + 3z 4)
7
29
(2x + y z + 5) = 0
7x + 14 y + 21z 28 54x 29y + 29z 145 = 0
47 x 15y + 50z 173 = 0
47x + 15y 50z + 173 = 0
OR
The equation of a plane passing through the
intersection of the given planes is
(4x y + z 10) + (x + y z 4) = 0
x(4 + ) + y ( 1) + z (1 ) 10 4 = 0
This plane is parallel to the line with direction ratios
proportional to 2, 1,1
2(4 + ) + 1( 1) + 1(1 ) = 0 = 4
Putting = 4 in (i), we obtain
5y 5z 6 = 0
This is the equation of the required plane.
Now, length of the perpendicular from (1, 1, 1) on (ii)
is given by
d =
2 2
) 5 ( 5
6 1 5 1 5
+

=
5
2 3

14. dx
a x
a a x
+
) sin(
) sin(

dx
a x
a a x a a x
+
) sin(
sin ) cos( cos ) sin(

= cos a. x + sin a. ln sin (x a) + c

15. sin x = t
cos x dx = dt

3 2
2
t t
dt

2 2
2 ) 1 (t
dt

log c t t + + | 2 ) 1 ( ) 1 ( |
2 2
replace t

16. take log

m log x + n log y = (m + n) log (x + y)
diff. |
.
|
\
|
+
+
+
= +
dx
dy
y x
n m
dx
dy
y
n
x
m
1
) (

x y x
my nx
dx
dy
y x y
my nx
) ( ) ( +
=
+
x y
dx
dy
/ =

17. C
1
C
1
+ C
2
+ C
3

(a + b + c)
c b c
c b b
c a b a
3 1
3 1
1
+
+
+ +

R
2
R
2
R
1
, R
3
R
1

(a + b + c)
a c a c
a b a b
c a b a
+ +
+ +
+ +
2 1
2 1
1

(a + b + c) [(2b + a) (2c + a) (a b) (a c)]
= (a + b + c) [3bc + 3ab + 3ac]
= 3 (a + b + c) (ab + bc ca) hence proved.

18. at y-axis
(
(
=
=
b y
x 0
pt = (0, b)
Now
a x
e
a
b
dx
dy
/
=

a
b
dx
dy
b
= |
.
|
\
|
, 0

equation of tangent y b =
a
b
(x 0)
1 / = + b y
a
x

19. centre = (h, 0) rad. = h equation is

(h, 0)

(x h)
2
+ (y 0)
2
= h
2

x
2
+ y
2
2hx = 0 (1)
Deff. 2x + 2y . y
1
2h = 0 ' y y x h + = (2)
From (1), (2)
x yy x y x ) ' ( 2
2 2
+ = +
OR
Let P(x, y) be any point on the curve. The equation of
the normal at P (x, y) to the given curve is
Y y =
dx dy /
1
(X x) (i)
It is given that the normal at each point passes through
(2, 0). Therefore, (i) also passes through (2, 0). Putting
Y = 0 and x = 2 in (i), we get
0 y =
dx dy /
1
(2 x)
y
dx
dy
= 2 x
ydy = (2 x) dx [On integrating both sides]

2
2
y
=
2
) 2 (
2
x
+ C
y
2
= (2 x)
2
+ 2C (ii)
This passes through (2, 3). Therefore,
9 = 0 + 2C C =
2
9

Putting C =
2
9
in (ii), we get
y
2
= (2 x)
2
+ 9
This is the equation of required curve.

20. Q f (x) is conti. at x = 1
f (1) = f (1)
1 =
0
lim
h
a (1 h)
2
b
1 = a b (1)

21. Let
x x
x x
y
=
10 10
10 10
1

Componendo dividendo rule

) 10 10 ( ) 10 10 (
) 10 10 ( ) 10 10 (
1
1
x x x x
x x x x
y
y

+ +
+
=
+

x
x
y
y
10 . 2
10 . 2
1
1
=
+

y
y
+
1
1
= 10
2x

x =
2
1
ln
10

|
|
.
|
\
|
+
y
y
1
1

|
.
|
\
|
+
=
x
x
n x f
1
1
2
1
) (
10
1
l

OR

f(1) =
2
1 1+
= 1

f(2) =
2
2
= 1
many-one function
If n odd natural number then 2n 1 is also odd
number
f(2n 1) =
2
1 1 2 + n
= n
If n even natural number then 2n is also an even
natural number
f(2n) =
2
2n
= n
f is onto function.

22. Let y = sin
1
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
1
2
x
x

put x = tan
y = sin
1
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
tan 1
tan 2

y = sin
1
(sin 2)
y = 2tan
1
x

2
1
2
x dx
dy
+
=
z = tan
1
x

2
1
1
x
dx
dz
+
=
Now
2
2
1 / 1
1 / 2
x
x
dz
dy
+
+
= = 2

Section C

23. Let x denotes the number of spades. Clearly x can
take the values 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Probability of getting a spade =
52
13
=
4
1

Probability of not getting a spade = 1
4
1
=
4
3

P(x = 0) = P (No spade) =
4
3
4
3
4
3
=
64
27

P(x = 1) = P (One spade and two non spade)
=
3
C
1

4
1

4
3

4
3
=
64
27

P(x = 2) = P (Two spades and one non spade)
=
3
C
2

4
1

4
1

4
3
=
64
9

P(x = 3) = P (Three spade) =
4
1

4
1

4
1
=
64
1

The probability distribution of the random variable x is

x 0 1 2 3
P(x)
64
27

64
27

64
9

64
1

24. The required line is to pass through
k j i a
2 =
and is to the plane given by

0 2 )
6 .( = + +
k j i r (i)
Here the vector k j i b
6 + + =
is normal to the
plane (1)
The required line is along the direction of this
vector. Hence its equation is

+ = b t a r
)
6 (
2 k j i t k j i r + + =
.(ii)
Now line (2) meets the plane (1), when

2
1
1
| | )
6 ( )
2 ( k j i t k j i + + 0 2 )
6 ( = + + k j i
i.e. when
6 (2 + 6t) + 3 (3 + 3t) + 5 (5t 5) = 2
i.e. when
35
1
= t
Substituting this value of t in (2), we get
)
6 (
35
1
2 k j i k j i r + + =

= )
170
108
76 (
35
1
k j i
The required point of intersection is

(

35
170
,
35
108
,
35
76

25. Let the distance covered at the speed 25 km/hour = x km
and the distance covered at the speed 40 km hour
= y km
maximum distance z = x + y
subject to constraints
2x + 5y 100
1
40 25
+
y x

x, y 0
Table for 2x + 5y = 100 (i)

x 0 50
y 20 0
Table for 1
40 25
= +
y x

x 0 25
y 40 0
Plot lines 2x + 5y = 100 and 1
40 25
= +
y x
on a graph
paper. The shaded region satisfy the given
inequalities.
D(25,0)
40 50
X
B
I
30 20
10
O
II
C
50
40
30
A (0, 20)
20
10
(0, 40)
Y
(
3
40
,
3
50
P

The coordinates of feasible region is A (0, 20)

(
3
40
,
3
50
P , D (25, 0)
Corner points z = x + 5

A (0, 20) z = 0 + 20 = 20
P
(
3
40
,
3
50
z = 30
3
40
3
50
= +
D (25, 0) z = 25 + 0 = 25
Max. distance covered = 30 km 50/3 km at the
speed of 25 km/hour and 40/3 km at the speed of
40 km/hour
26. I
st
part : Area = dx x x x

3
0
2
)] ( ) 2 [(
=
3
0
3 2
3 2
3
(
(
x x

area = 9/2

(0, 0)
(2, 0)
(3, 3)

2
nd
part :
Both curve intersect at
) 2 , 3 2 ( ), 2 , 3 2 (

(4, 0)
(0, 4)
) 2 , 3 2 (

Area = 2
(
+

4
2
2
2
0
16 6 dy y dy y
=
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
4
2
1 2 2
0
2 / 3
4 / sin 16
2
1
16
2
1
) (
3
2
. 6 2 y y y y
=
3
16
3
3 4
+

27. I =
2 /
0
xdx sin log (1)
By property
I =
2 /
0
dx x cos log (2)

2I =
|
.
|
\
|
2 /
0
dx
2
x 2 sin
log
2I =
2 /
0
) 2 (log xdx 2 sin log
2 /
0
dx
2I = I
1
log2
2
(3)
Now In I
1
2x = t
dx = 1/2 dt
I
1
=
0
dt t sin log
2
1

=
2 /
0
dt t sin log 2 .
2
1

I
1
= I
(4)
From (3), (4), 2I = I /2 log 2
I = /2 log 2

28. System of equations can be written as :

(
(
(
1 1 2
1 1 2
1 1 1
.
(
(
(
z
y
x
=
(
(
(
2
2
5

AX = B
X = A
1
. B =
|
|
.
|
\
|
| A |
) A ( Adj
B
X =
8
1

(
(
(

1 3 4
3 1 4
2 2 0

(
(
(
2
2
5

(
(
(
z
y
x
=
(
(
(
2
2
1

x = 1, y = 2, z = 3
OR
System of equations can be written as :

(
(
(
1 3 2
2 1 1
2 1 2
.
(
(
(
z
y
x
=
(
(
(
2
2
3

A . X = B
X = A
1
. B =
|
|
.
|
\
|
| A |
A Ad
j
. B
X =
(
(
(
1 4 1
2 6 5
0 7 7
7
1
.
(
(
(
2
2
3

X =
(
(
(
z
y
x
=
(
(
(
1
1
1

x = 1, y = 1, z = 1

29. Let length, width x
height y
volume v = x
2
y (1)
are s = x
2
+ 4xy (2)
s = x
2
+
x
v 4
(from (1), (2))

dx
ds
= 2x ,
4
2
x
v
0
8
2
3 2
2
> + =
x
v
dx
s d

Now 0 =
dx
ds
2x 0
4
2
=
x
v

x = 2y (Q v = x
2
y)

PHYSICS

1. There are many atoms in an atomic hydrogen gas
sample and electrons of different atoms can make
different transitions and different wavelength
radiations are emitted.

2. Frequency remains constant when light passes from
one medium to other.

3. Those sources which have constant phase difference
are called coherent sources. These are derived from
a single sources.

4. Kinetic energy depends on frequency of incident
radiations not on intensity so kinetic energy remains
same.

5. Average power over a complete cycle of ac through
an ideal inductor (Resistance = 0) is zero.
P
av
= (I
rms
) (V
rms
) cos
cos =
Z
R
= 0
P
av
= 0
6.

A B
+

1A 1 2

V
A
V
B
= 1 2 + 2 + 1 1 = 5 V
7. Xrays 3 10
19
to 1 10
16
Hz
Microwave 3 10
11
to 1 10
9
Hz
U-V rays 5 10
17
to 8 10
14
Hz
Radio Waves 3 10
7
to 3 10
4
Hz

8. =

A . E , =
0
q

i
= EA cos 180
f
= EA cos 0

i
= EA

f
= + EA

i
= 5 10
5
V m
f
= 4 10
5
V m
5 10
5
+ 4 10
5

=
0
q
, q =
0
10
5
Cb

9. Intensity of radiations is 64 = 2
6
times the safe value.
So after six half lines it would be safe so
t = 6T = 6 2 = 12 hours.

10. On temperature rise more valance band electrons
become free and more free electrons and hole pair
will be produced and conductivity of semiconductor
increases.

11. In optical fibres refractive index of cladding is less
than core. So that electromagnetic wave traveling in
core when incidents other cladding at an angle
greater than i
c
. Total internal reflection will occur
which is necessary for transmission of signals from
one place to other.

12. Object should be placed at 2F of convex lens so as to
form image of same size. It can't happen in case of
concave lens because it always forms a diminished
image.

13. Using d =
R T
Rh 2 Rh 2 +
= ) h h ( R 2
R T
+
= 20.8 km 5 = 46.5 km

14. When a charge +Q is given to the insulated plate,
then a charge Q is induced on the nearer face of the
plate.

E
+ Q Q

Net electric field between the plate
E =
0
also, E =
d
V

V = Ed =
0
d
=
C
Q
C =
d
A
0

with dielectric. C' =
d
A
r 0

MOCK TEST-3 (SOLUTION)

MOCK TEST 3 PUBLISHED IN SAME ISSUE
15. X = ?
Y = 20
l
1
= 40 cm
l l
1
= 60 cm
X
Y
B
C
G
A
D
V
1
V
2

l
1
l

l
1

V
1
l
1

V
2
(l

l
1
)

) (
Y X
1 1
l l l
=

40
X
=
60
20
or
40
X
=
3
1
or X =
3
40

When X and Y are interchanged
Y
X
B
C
G
A
D
l
2
l

l
2

2
Y
l
=
) (
X
2
l l

2
20
l
=
) 100 ( 3
40
2
l

2
1
l
=
) 100 ( 3
2
2
l

300 3l
2
= 2l
2
or 5l
2
= 300
l
2
= 60 cm

16.
d 2
F
0
2 1
2
d

17. (i) V
com
=
2 1
2 2 1 1
C C
V C V C
+
+

(ii) U
i
=
2
2 2
2
1 1
V C
2
1
V C
2
1
+
U
f
=
2
1
(C
1
+ C
2
)
2
com
V

18. B
0
=
c
E
0

19. Work-function : Minimum energy needed by a free
electron to remove it from metallic surface.
Threshold frequency : Minimum frequency
required for photo-electron emission.
Threshold wavelength : Maximum wavelength of
incident radiations required for photoelectric
emission.
Stopping potential : Minimum potential required
across the photo cell to completely stop the photo
current.
20. (E
n
) =
2
n
6 . 13
eV, for ground state n = 1
(E
1
) = 13.6 eV
For hydrogen like atom, (E
n
) HLA = Z
2
(E
n
) H
= eV
n
6 . 13 Z
2
2

For He
+
atom, Z = 2 and n = 2
(E
2
)
He
= 4
(
4
6 . 13
= 13.6 eV

21. m 10 5 . 1
d
D 5
2
=

d = 0.56 10
3
m
D = 2.8 m

2
3
10 5 . 1
10 56 . 0
8 . 2 5

= 6 10
7
m
= 6000

22. Source frequency =
c

Band width of system =
100
x
=
c
100
x

Number of channels N which can be transmitted
simultaneously can be found out by dividing band
width by the system with band width of one channel.
i.e.,
N =
F 100
xc
F
100
xc
=
|
.
|
\
|

23.
4
3
2
1
R
R
R
R
=

24. (1) Resistance = R
(2) Reactance are of two types
(a) Capacitive Reactance
X
C
=
C
1

(b) Inductive Reactance
X
L
= L
(3) Impendence = Z =
2
C L
2
) X X ( R +

(4)

X
C

X
L

25. Force = F = Bil
For current (i)
i = |
.
|
\
|
R
emf
=
R
Bvl
F =
R
v B
2 2
l

26. Cyclotron work on the fact that a positively charged
particle can be accelerated to a sufficiently high
energy with the help of smaller values of oscillating
electric field by making it to cross the same electric
field time and again with use of strong magnetic
field.
North
target
South
B (Magnetic Field) H.F
oscillator
Dees D
1
Dees D
2
Magnet

27.

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

l r

0
in
q
ds . E
r

E.2rl =
0
l

E =
r 2
0

28. Bending of light from sharp edges is called
diffraction. Difference between interference and
diffraction.

Interference Diffraction
(i) Two coherent sources
are necessary
(i) One source is
Necessary
(ii) All fringes are of
same width
(ii) CM has double
width than all
other fringes
(iii) All bright fringes has
equal intensity
(iii) as order of bright
fringes increases,
intensity goes down
(iv) For bright fringes
path difference = n
(iv) For bright fringes,
Path difference
= (2n 1)
2
.
(v) For dark fringes, path
difference = (2n
1)
2

(v) For dark fringes,
path difference
= n
Angular width of CM =
3
10
10 5 . 0
10 5000 2
a
2

= 2 10
3
Radian
OR
When white light incidents over prism then it divide
it into component colours. This phenomenon is
called diffraction and angle between end colours is
called angular dispersion. Prism deviates violet
colour maximum as its refractive index for violet
colour is maximum.
=
1
y
R v

=
1 5170 . 1
5140 . 1 5318 . 1

= .034

29.
white

Types of spectrum
Spectrum is of 2 types.
(i) Emission
(ii) Absorption.
(i) Emission : - If radiations emitted from a substance
is obtained ones screen after passing through the prism
then spectrum is called emission spectrum.
It is line emission spectrum for substances at atomic
level in gaseous state.
It is continuous spectrum for substances in liquid or
solid state.
(ii) Absorption spectrum : - The substance of which
absorption spectrum is to be find out is placed in a
transparent tube and white light is passed through it
now substance absorb radiation corresponding to some
particular wavelength and black lines are obtained for
these absorbed radiations. These black lines are called
absorption spectrum.
OR
Energy of emitted photons from H-atom = 10.2 eV
Work function of metallic surface
=
4000
12400
eV = 3.1 eV
Now According to Einstein's Law of Photo-electric
effect '
E = w + K.E.
max.

10.2 = 3.1 + K.E.
max

K.E.
max
= 7.1 eV Ans

30. Moving Coil Galvanometer Principle : When a
coil carrying current is placed in a magnetic field, it
experiences a Torque = NiAB sin . This Torque
is proportional to the current passed through it.

N
S
Torsion Head
Mirror
Frame
Core
Copper coil
Phosphor
Bronze
Spring
T
1

T
2

Working : When a current is passed through the
coil, the two vertical limbs experience a force normal
to it, equal in magnitude and parallel but opposite in
sense. No forces act on the horizontal sides as they
are parallel to the field .Since the field is radial, the
forces acting on the vertical parts of coil remain
always perpendicular to the plane of the coil in all its
positions so that the perpendicular distance between
the forces is always equal to breadth of the coil. Thus
the coil is subjected to a torque whose magnitude is
given by
= NiAB (i)
Under the action of this deflecting torque, the coil
rotates on its axis. Due to elastic forces, a restoring
torque
r
is produced in the suspension coil, which is
perpendicular to the twist produced in the wire.

r
= or
r
= C (ii)
where C is restoring torque per unit twist, and it is
called the constant of twist for the suspension. As
soon as restoring torque becomes equal to the
deflecting torque, equilibrium is established. The coil
does not rotate further. Let be the angle through
which the coil rotates till it reaches the equilibrium
position.

=
r
or NiAB = C (iii)
i =
NAB
C
= K.
K =
NAB
C
is constant for the instrument, called
Galvanometer constant.
i .
Thus deflection of coil is proportional to the current
passing through it. The deflection can be measured
by using a lamp and scale arrangement.
OR
Consider two infinitely long thin conductors
carrying currents in opposite directions.
Magnetic field B
1
due to I
1
at P on conductor CD is
given by
B
1
=
r 2
I
1 0

B
I
1
D
P
B
1
F
2
F
1
B
2
r
A
C
I
2

Q

The magnetic field B
1
is perpendicular to plane of
paper and directed inward. This field will produce a
force/length F
2
on conductor given CD by
F
2
= B
1
I
2
=
r 2
I I
2 1 0
[Q F = BI l, Here l = 1]
By Fleming's left hand rule direction of F
2
is away
from conductor AB.
Similarly the current I
2
will create a field B
2
at Q
directed inward which in turn will create force/length
F
1

F
1
= B
2
I
1
=
r 2
I I
2 1 0

By Fleming's left hand rule, the direction of F
1
is
away from the conductor CD. Hence the two
conductors repel each other.
Definition of Ampere If I
1
= I
2
= 1A, and r = 1m,
then
F =
1 7
7
0
Nm 10 2
2
10 4
2

Thus one ampere is that current which on flowing
through each of the two parallel uniform linear
conductors placed in free space at a distance of one
meter from each other produces between them a
force of 2 10
7
N per metre of their lengths.

CHEMISTRY

1. CH
3
CH
2
CH=CH
2
+ HCl
Cl
CH CH CH CH
|
3 2 3

2. (ii) > (iii) > (i) > (iv)

3. By fehling solution, tollen reagent etc.
4. Amino acid are compound containing amino group
and carboxylic group.
Structure of alanine is

H
3
NCHCOO

+
CH
3
5. Movement of colloidal particles towards opposite
terminal takes place which is called as
electrophoresis.

6. It is a stoichiometric defect in which an ion (cation)
get displaced from its position and get arranged as an
interstitial particle it is called Frenkel defect in this
defect a vacancy or interstitial defect are formed
simultaneously. Due to Frenkel defect.
(i) Density remains same
(ii) Electrical conductivity improved

7. No of particle are different in sugar and NaCl. As
dissociation in NaCl takes place.
8. Methyl 3-bromo 2-oxo butanoate
9. (i) Sandmayer reaction.

Cl

(ii) Kuchrous reaction
CH CH CH
2
= CH
|
OH
CH
3
CHO
10. (i)
Hydrolysis
H
isocyanide Ethyl
5 2
HOH 2 C N H C + =
+

HCOOH NH H C
e min a Ethyl
2 5 2
+
(ii)
NH
H
Aniline
NCCH
3
+ HCl
H

N-Phenylethanamide
+ ClCCH
3

H

Acetyl chloride

Base
O

11. The given reaction will be as

CH
3
CH
2
CH

+ CH
3
MgBr

H2O
OH
H2O
H2SO4
Alc. KOH
(B)
O
(A)
CH
3
CH
2
CHCH
3
CH
3
CH=CHCH
3
Br2
CH
3
CHCHCH
3
Br Br
CH
3
CCCH
3
(C)
(D)

Structural formula of A :
H C CH CH
| |
O
2 3

Structural formula of B : CH
3
CH=CHCH
3

Structural formula of C :
CH
3
CHCHCH
3
Br Br

Structural formula of D : CH
3
CCCH
3

12.
NC

Aniline
(i)
Carbylamine

+ CH
3
Cl + 3 KOH
Chloroform

NH
2
+ 3 KCl + 3 H
2
O


Phenol

(ii)

+ Br
2

OH

H2O
2,4,6-tribromophenol
OH

Br Br
Br

13. I
st
Method : Given K = 2.303
t
1/2
=
K
3 . 0 303 . 2
=
303 . 2
3 . 0 303 . 2
= 0.3 sec.
t
90
=
3
10
t
1/2
=
3
10
0.3 = 1 sec
II method
K =
t
303 . 2
ln
|
|
.
|
\
|
x a
a
0
0

2.303 =
90
t
303 . 2
ln
10
100

t
90
= 1 sec

14. P =
B
0
B A
0
A
x P x P + {P
A
= 450 mm
P
B
= 700 mm}
600 = 450 x
A
+ 700 x
B

= 450 (1 x
B
) + 700 x
B
= 450 + 250 x
B

250 x
B
= 600 450 = 150
x
B
=
5
3
& x
A
=
5
2

15. vapour pressure of solution p
A
= 0.8 p
A

let mass of solute be Wg moles of solute =
40
W

mole of octane n
0
=
114
114
= 1
x
B
=
1 40 / W
40 / W
+

A
A
p
p
=

A
A A
p
p 8 . 0 p
= x
B
=
1 40 / W
40 / W
+

0.2 =
1 40 / W
40 / W
+
, W =
8 . 0
40 2 . 0
= 10g

16. (i) Aldol condensation : Two molecules of an
aldehyde or a ketone having at least one
-hydrogen atom, condense in the presence of a
dilute alkali to give -hydroxy aldehyde or
-hydroxy ketone.

CH
3
C + HCH
2
CHO
O

H

Dil. NaOH

CH
3
CCH
2
CHO
OH
H

Ethanal

Ethanal

Aldol

(ii) Trans-Esterification : An ester on reaction with
excess of alcohol in the presence of mineral acid
forms a new ester.
CH
3
COCH
3
+ CH
3
CH
2
OH
O
H
+

CH
3
COCH
2
CH
3
+ CH
3
OH
Methyl
ethanoate
Ethanol

O

Ethyl ethanoate Methanol

17
COCH3
Benzene
(i)
CH3COCl + Anhyd. AlCl3
F.C.acylation
Acetophenone

CH
3
C = O
Ethanal
(ii)
H
CH3MgBr
Dry ether
CH
3
C OMgBr
H
CH
3
H
+
/H2O
CH
3
C OH
H
CH
3
Cu
573 K
CH
3
C = O + H
2
CH
3
Propanone

18. (a) Cr
+3
,
s
=

15 Fe
+3
> Cr
+3
> V
+3

V
+3
,
s
= 8
Fe
+3
,
s
= 35
(b) CuSO
4
(aq)

19. Conversions :
(i) 1-bromopropane to 2-bromopropane

CH
3
CH
2
CHBr
alc. KOH
CH
3
CH = CH
2
HBr
(Peroxide)
CH
3
CHCH
3
Br
(ii) CH
3
CCH
3
I2
O
CH
3
CC.I
3
NaOH
O

CHI
3
Na
(iii)
OH

Phenol

CO
2
ONa

47 atm.

OH

COONa

20. DNA has a hydrogen bonded double helical
structure. The two strands are antiparallel. It can be
considered a polymer of nucleotide (Base + sugar +
phosphoric acid). In a nucleotide base and
phosphate are linked to C
1
and C
5
of sugar
molecule respectively. Two nucleotide are linked
by 3 5 phosphodiester bonds. Hydrogen bonds
are formed between

Puric bases
Adenine = Thyonine & Guanine cytosine
Pyrimidal bases

P
P
S
S
5
3
5
4
3
2
1
H bond
A = T
P
S
S
G
C
P
3
5

21. (a)
CH
2
CH
Cl
H

(b)
CH
2
C
OCOCH
3
H
CH
3

(c)

CF
2
CF
2
H

22. Antacids are drugs used to relieve acidity these can
act in any of the following ways
(a) neutralize acid in stomach
Ex NaHCO
3
, milk of magnesia
(b) stop acid production in stomach
Ex oneprazole, lasoprazole
(c) antihistaminic
Ex- Ranitidine (zantac)
23. Absorption at the surface is called adsorption. In
adsorption the conc. of adsorbate is greater at the
surface than in the inner bulk.
Adsorption of gases :
Temperature : As temperature physisorption
continuously where as with increase in
temperature chemisorption first increases than
decreases.

P
h
y
s
i
s
o
r
p
t
i
o
n
T

c
h
e
m
i
s
o
r
p
t
i
o
n
T

Pressure : With increases in pressure adsorption of
gases increases.
24. (i) Schottky defect : It is a stoichiometric defect in
which pair of cations and anions get displaced from
their position in such a manner a pair of vacancies
are created simultaneously
In this defect
(1) Density (2) Electrical conductiriy
(ii) Interstials : when particles may be an additional
particle of same material a foreign particle get
arranged in the spaces between regular arrangement
of particles.
(iii) F-centres : when crystal of NaCl is heated in the
vapours of Na Cl
ions get displaced from its

position and diffused into the Na vapour. And NaCl
is formed which get deposited at the surface and in
place of Cl
ion e
get arranged. This results in

colour in the NaCl crystal. Other example LiCl in Li
vapours become Pink, KCl in K vapours become
violet.

25. (i) Let a
0
= 100 M, conc. after 10 min a
0
x
= 100 20

t
303 . 2
k = log
|
|
.
|
\
|
x a
a
0
0

=
10
303 . 2
log
80
100
= 0.02231 min
1

(ii) Let the time for 75% completion = t min
x = 75 M
t =
k
303 . 2
log
|
|
.
|
\
|
x a
a
0
0

=
02231 . 0
303 . 2
log
25
100
= 62.15 min

26. (a) Cerium (Ce),
(b) Due to lanthanoide contraction.
(c) In basic medium, K
2
Cr
2
O
7
converts into K
2
CrO
4

hence its colour changes while in acidic medium
K
2
CrO
4
converts into K
2
Cr
2
O
7

27 (a) 4FeCr
2
O
4
+16 NaOH+
) air (
2
O 7
8 Na
2
CrO
4
+2Fe
2
O
3
+ 8H
2
O
2Na
2
CrO
4
+ H
2
SO
4

Na
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ Na
2
SO
4
+ H
2
O
Na
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ 2KCl K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+2NaCl
(b) K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ 7H
2
SO
4
+ 6KI
Cr
2
(SO
4
)
3
+ 4K
2
SO
4
+ 3I
2
+ 7H
2
O
2KMnO
4
+ 3H
2
SO
4
+ 5H
2
S
2MnSO
4
+ K
2
SO
4
+ 8H
2
O + 5S
28. (a) Acetylene is first oxidized with 40% H
2
SO
4
in the
presence of HgSO
4
H C C H + H
2
O
4
4 2
HgSO % 1
SO H %, 40
CH
3
CHO
Acetylene Acetaldehyde
Acetaldehyde is finally oxidized to acid with air in the
presence of manganous acetate catalyst

acid Acetic
3
Acetate
Manganous
de Acetaldehy
3
COOH CH ] O [ CHO CH +

(b) (i) CH
3
COOH
2
) OH ( Ca
(CH
3
COO)
2
Ca
Calcium acetate

Ca (HCOO)
2
3
de Acetaldehy
3
CaCO 2 CHO CH +
(ii) CH
3
COOH
2
) OH ( Ca
(CH
3
COO)
2
Ca
Acetic acid

3
Acetone
3 3
CaCO COCH CH +

(c) When heated with I
2
+ NaCO
3
Solution, acetone
gives yellow crystals of iodoform CH
3
COCH
3
+
3NaOI CH
3
I + CH
3
COONa
Acetone Yellow ppt.
(Iodoform)
Acetic acid does not give iodoform test.
(d) The carbonyl group in COOH is inert and does
not show nucleophilic addition reaction like carbonyl
compounds. It is due to resonance stabilization of
carboxylate ions.

R C = O
O

R C = O
O

Or
(a) (i) Due to smaller + I-effect of one alkyl group
in aldehydes as a compared to larger +I-effect of two
alkyl groups, the magnitude of positive charge on the
carbonyl carbon is more in aldehydes than in ketones.
As a result nucleophilic addition reaction occur more
readily in aldehyde than in ketones.

(ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones are
lower than corresponding acids and alcohols due to
absence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding .
(iii) Aldehydes and ketones undergo a number of
addition reactions as both possess the carbonyl
functional group which reacts a number of
nucleophiles such as HNC, NaHSO
3
, alcohols,
ammonia derivatives and Grignard reagents.
(b) (i) Distinction between acetaldehyde and
benzaldehyde: Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde can be
distinguish by Fehling solution.
Acetaldehyde give red coloured precipitate with
Fehling solution while benzaldehyde does not.
+ +
+
4 4 3 4 4 2 1
Solution Fehling
2
3
OH 5 2Cu CHO CH
O H O Cu COO CH
2
. ppt red
2 3
+ +

(ii) Distinction between Propanone and Propanol :
Propanone (CH
3
COCH
3
) and propanol
(CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
OH) can be distinguish by iodoform
test. Propanone when warmed with sodium
hypoiodide (NaOI) i.e. I
2
in NaOH, it gives yellow
ppt of idoform while propanol does not respond to
iodoform test.
+ NaOI 3 COCH CH
opanone Pr
3 3

NaOH 2 COONa CH I CH
3
ppt Yellow
3
+ +
29. (a) Net cell reaction
Mg (s) + 2Ag
+
(aq) 2Ag(s) + Mg
+2
(aq)
According to nernst equation
E
cell
= E
cell

n
0591 . 0
log
| |
| |
2
2
Ag
Mg
+
+

= 0.80 ( 2.37)
2
0591 . 0
log
2 3
) 10 1 (
2 . 0

= 3.32 V
when conc. of Mg
+2
is decreased to 0.1, the new emf is
E
cell
= 3.17
2
0591 . 0
log
2 3
) 10 1 (
1 . 0

= 3.34 V
(b) (i) Mg > l > Zn > Fe > Cu
As we move downwards in the electro chemical
series tendency to displace increases.
(ii) K > Mg > Cr > Hg > Ag

30. (i) Cl
2
> Br
2
> F
2
> I
2
(due to exceptionally small size
of F, F
2
has lower bond energy than expected)
(ii) HF < HCl < HBr < HI (according to bond length)
(iii) NH
3
> PH
3
> AsH
3
> SbH
3

(according to density of lonepair on central atom)
(iv) H
2
O > H
2
Te > H
2
Se > H
2
S
(according to strength of intermolecular bonding)
(v) HOCl < HClO
2
<HClO
3
< HClO
4

(according to no. of O atoms attached to Cl)

MATHEMATICS

Section A

1. y = A cos (x + B)

dx
dy
= A sin (x + B)

2
2
dx
y d
= A cos (x + B)

2
2
dx
y d
= y
2
2
dx
y d
+ y = 0

2.
+ + 4 / cos 4 / sin 2 4 / sin 4 / cos

2 2
x x x x dx
dx x x
+ ) 4 / sin 4 / (cos = 4 sin (x/4) 4 cos (x/4) + c

3.
a = k j i
+ ;
b = k i
,
2
a = k j i
2 +

b 2
a =
6 4 2
3 0 1

k j i

= k j i
12
2 1
= )

3
3 ( 4 k j i + +
|
b 2
a | = | )

3
3 ( 4 | k j i + +
=
2 2 2
1 3 3 4 + + = 19 4

4.
a = k j i
+ ,
b = k j i
3 +

a +
b = k j i

4 + ,

b = k j i
2 +
(
a +
b ) . (
b ) = ( k j i

4 + ).( k j i
2 + )
= 4 ( 2) + 1 3 1 ( 5)
= 8 + 3 + 5 = 0

a +
b is perpendicular to
b .

5. Let the position vectors of A, B, C, D be j
7 i
6 ,
k
4 j
29 i
16 , k
6 j
3 and k
10 j
5 i
2 + +
respectively. Then
AB = OB OA
= ( k
4 j
29 i
16 ) ( j
7 i
6 )
= k
4 j
22 i
10
AC = ( k
6 j
3 ) ( j
7 i
6 )
= k
6 j
10 i
6 +
AD = ( k
10 j
5 i
2 + + ) ( j
7 i
6 )
= k
10 j
12 i
4 + +
Now =
10 12 4
6 10 6
4 22 10

Operate R
1
R
1
+ R
2
+ R
3

=
10 12 4
6 10 6
0 0 0
= 0
The points A, B, C and D are coplanar.

6. Put x = a sin
= tan
1
(
cos a
sin a

= tan
1
(tan ) =
= sin
1
|
.
|
\
|
a
x

7. g (f(x)) = |5 f(x) 2|
= | 5 | x | 2| =
<
0 x |, 2 x 5 |
0 x |, 2 x 5 |

8. ( )
2 4 4 3
B A

. C
23

= (X)
32
. C
23

= (Y)
33
final order = 3 3

9. x + 2 = (2 3) 3x = 1 x = 1/3

10. 2 20 = 2x
2
24 2x
2
= 6 x = 3

Section B

11. Let A and B denote the two events respectively
P( A ) =
2 5
5
+
=
7
5
, P(B) =
5 6
6
+
=
11
6

P(A) = 1
7
5
=
7
2
, P( B ) = 1
11
6
=
11
5

P(At least one of A and B happens)
= 1 P(none of A and B happens)
= 1 P ( A B )
= 1
7
5

11
5
=
77
52

OR
Let A total of 8 in first throw
B total of 8 in 2nd throw
Number of exhaustive cases when a pair of dice is
thrown = 6 6 = 36
Cases favourable to a total of 8 in each throw are
(2, 6), (6, 2), (3, 5), (5, 3), (4, 4)
Their number = 5
P(A) = P(B) = 5/36
P(A and B) = P(A). P(B) =
36
5

36
5
=
1296
25

12.
dx
dy
+
2
x 1
x 2
+
y =
2
2
x 1
x 4
+

Here P =
2
x 1
x 2
+
, Q =
2
2
x 1
x 4
+

I.F. =
+
dx
x 1
x 2
2
e =
) x 1 ( n
2
e
+ l
= 1 + x
2

Solution is : y (1 + x
2
) =
+
2
2
x 1
x 4
(1 + x
2
) dx + c
y(1+x
2
) =
3
x 4
3
+ c
13.
+
+
dx
) x 2 (
1 ) x 2 (
e
2
x

(
(
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
+
+
dx
) x 2 (
1
x 2
1
e
2
x

f(x) f (x)
= c
x 2
1
. e
x
+
+

OR
dx
x x
x

2 2 2
) ( 1
2

Let x
2
= t. Then, d(x
2
) = dt 2x dx = dt dx =
x
dt
2

I =

2
1 t t
dt
=
+ } 1 {
2
t t
dt

=
+ + } 1
4
1
4
1
{
2
t t
dt

=
|
.
|
\
|
+
4
5
2
1
2
t
dt
=
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
2
1
4
5
t
dt

=
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
2
2
2
1
2
5
t
dt

I = sin
1

|
|
.
|
\
| +
2 / 5
2 / 1 t
+ C
= sin
1

|
|
.
|
\
| +
5
1 2t
+ C
= sin
1

|
|
.
|
\
|
+
5
1 2
2
x
+ C

14. Divide by cos
2
x in N
r
& D
r
both

+
dx
) 1 x tan 2 )( 2 x (tan
x sec
2

Let tan x = t
sec
2
x dx = dt

+ ) 1 t 2 )( 2 t (
dt

+ ) 2 / 1 t )( 2 t (
dt
2
1

+
dt
2 / 1 t
1
2 t
1
5
2
.
2
1

c
) 2 / 1 t (
) 2 t (
log
5
1
+
(
+

15. Position vector of A is
k
2 j
3 + + A (3, 1, 2)
Position vector of B is
k
4 j
2 i
B(1, 2, 4)
d.r.s of the line AB are 3, 1, 1 ( 2), 2 ( 4)
i.e. 2, 3, 6
Eq. of the required plane through B and
perpendicular line AB is
2 (x 1) + 3 (y + 2) + 6 (z + 4) = 0
2x + 3y + 6z + 28 = 0

16.
a = k
3 i
+ ,
b = k
+ and
c = k
c =
1 1 2
1 1 1
k
= k
3 i
2 + +
L.H.S =
a (
c )
=
1 3 2
1 3 1
k
= k
9 j
6 + +
Next
a .
c = ( k
3 i
+ ).( k
2 )
= 2 + 3 1 = 4

a .
c = ( k
3 i
+ ). ( k
+ )
= 1 + 3 + 1 = 5
R.H.S = (
a .
c )
b (
a .
b )
c
= 4( k
+ ) 5( k
2 )
= k
6 + + = L.H.S.

17.
dx
dy
=
2 x 3 2
3
= 2 (slope of line)

4
3
= 2 x 3 9/16 = 2x 2 x =
48
41

y = 3/4
eq
n
of tangent
(y
4
3
) = 2 |
.
|
\
|
48
41
x 48 x 24 y = 23

18. Let y =
y
x y = x
y/2

log y = x log
2
y

dx
dy
|
|
.
|
\
|
x log
2
1
y
1
=
x 2
y

dx
dy
=
) x log y 2 ( x
y
2

OR
Let y = tan
1

(
(
+ +
+
2 2
2 2
1 1
1 1
x x
x x
, z = cos
1
x
2

put x
2
= cos 2
y = tan
1

+ +
+
2 cos 1 2 cos 1
2 cos 1 2 cos 1

y = tan
1

(
+

sin cos
sin cos

dx
dz
=
4
1
1
x
.2x
y = tan
1
[tan (/4 )]
y =
4

2
1
cos
1
x
2

dx
dy
=
2
1
|
|
.
|
\
|
x
x
2 .
1
1
4

dx
dy
=
4
1 x
x

dz
dy
=
dx dz
dx dy
/
/
=
4
4
1 / 2
1 /
x x
x x

=
2
1

19 Taking log
y log x = x y
y =
x log 1
x
+

dx
dy
=
2
) x log 1 (
) x / 1 ( x 1 ). x log 1 (
+
+

dx
dy
=
2
) x log 1 (
x log
+

20. Q f(/4) = f(/4
+
)

=
0 h
lim

) h 4 / ( 2 cot
)] h 4 / ( 4 / tan[
+
+

=
0 h
lim
h 2 tan
h tan
=
0 h
lim
h 2
h 2
h 2 tan
h
h
h tan
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1/2
21. Let y = f(x)
y = 1 + x
x =
1 y
f
1
(x) =
1 x

Now f(x) = f
1
(x)
1 + x =
1 x

Compose 1 = 1/, = 1/

= 1 = 1 ,
= 1

22. L.H.S =
4 x x 8 x 10
x x 4 x 5
x x x
+
+
4 x x 8 y 8
x x 4 y 4
x x y
+

= x
2
4 x 8 10
x 4 5
x 1 1
+
+ y.x
x 4 x 8 y 8
x x 4 y 4
x 1 1
+

= x
2
(
(
(
+
4 8 10
0 4 5
0 1 1
x 8 10
x 4 5
x 1 1
+ 0
= x
2
(
(
(
+ 0
1 7 2
1 3 1
1 1 0
x + 0 = x
3
.(7 6) = x
3
OR

xy z
zx y
yz x
1
1
1
=
xyz
1
xyz z z
xyz y y
xyz x x
2
2
2
=
xyz
xyz
1 z z
1 y y
1 x x
2
2
2

C
1
C
3

2
2
2
1
1
1
z z
y y
y x

R
1
R
1
R
2
, R
2
R
2
R
3

=
2
2 2
2 2
1
0
0
z z
z y z y
y x y x

= (x y) (y z)
2
1
1 0
1 0
z z
z y
y x
+
+

= (x y) (y z)
z y
y x
+
+
1
1

= (x y) (y z) [(y + z) (x + y)]
= (x y) (y z) (z x)

Section C

23. The ball transferred from the first bag to the second
bag can either be white or black.
Case I : When white ball is transferred from the I
st

bag to the second.
Probability of getting white ball from I
st
bag =
4 5
5
+

=
9
5
.
Now, second bag contains 8 white and 9 black balls.
The probability of drawing a white ball from the
second bag =
9 8
8
+
=
17
8
.
The probability of both these events taking place
together is =
9
5

17
18
=
153
40

Case II : When a black ball is transferred from the I
st

bag to the second probability of getting black ball
from I
st
bag =
4 5
4
+
=
9
4
.
The probability of drawing a white ball from the
second bag is
10 7
7
+
=
17
7

Q The probability of both these events taking place
together is =
9
4

17
7
=
153
28

Hence, the required probability
=
153
40
+
153
28
=
153
68
=
9
4
.
24.

(0, 0) (1, 0)
A(1/2,
2 / 3
)
(2, 0)

required are
A =
(
+

dx x 1 dx ) 1 x ( 1 2
1
2 / 1
2
2 / 1
0
2

A = 2
|
.
|
\
|
+
2 / 1
0
1 2
) 1 x ( sin
2
1
) 1 x ( 1 ) 1 x (
2
1

(
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
1
2 / 1
1 2
x sin
2
1
x 1 x
2
1
=
3
2

2
3

25. I
st
Part
I =
+
0
x cos x cos
x cos
e e
e
.... (1)
By property
I =
+
0
x cos x cos
x cos
e e
e
.... (2)
By property
(
(
=

0 0
dx ) x ( f dx ) x ( f
eq
n
(1) + (2)
2 I =
+
+
0
x cos x cos
x cos x cos
e e
e e
dx I = /2
2
nd
Part
I =

+
4 /
4 /
4 /
4 /
x 2 cos 2
dx
4 / dx
x 2 cos 2
dx

I
1
I
2

Since I
1
is an odd function therefore I
1
= 0
I =
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
4 /
4 /
2
2
x tan 1
x tan 1
2
dx
4 /
=
4 /
4 /
2 2
2
) x tan 3 ( 1
x sec
4 /
=
4 /
0
2 2
2
) x tan 3 ( 1
x sec
4 / 2 [Q f(x) is even function]
Let 3 tan x = t sec
2
x dx =
3
dt

=
3
0
2
t 1
3 / dt
2
= ( )
3
0
1
t tan 3 2 / =
3 6
2

26. The given lines are

r = ( k
3 j
2 i
+ ) + t ( k
2 j
+ )
and
r = ( k
) + s ( k
2 j
2 i
+ )
Here
1
a = k
3 j
2 i
+ ;
1
b = k
2 j
2
a = k
2
b = k
2 j
2 i
1
b
2
b =
2 2 1
2 1 1
k
= k
3 j
4 i
2
The S.D. between the gives lines
=
| b b |
) a a ).( b b (
2 1
2 1 2 1

=
| k
3 j
4 i
2 |
) k
4 j
).( k
3 j
4 i
2 (

=
2 2 2
3 4 2
12 4
+ +
+
=
29
8

27. Part I
st

Let x kg and y kg. of fertilizer A and B be mixed by
the farmer. Then LPP is
Minimize : C = 5x + 8y
subject to the constraints
x
100
10
+ y
100
5
7 2x + y 140
x
100
6
+ y
100
10
7 3x + 5y 350
x 0, y 0

y
P
x
A C
O
D
(0, 140)B
(1)
(50, 40)
(
0 ,
3
350

(2)

Draw the lines
2x + y = 140 ..... (1)
3x + 5y = 350 ..... (2)
The shaded unbounded region is the feasible region.
These line meet at P(50, 40)
Now value of c = 5x + 8y
at C
(
0 ,
3
350
, is
3
1750
= 583
3
1

at P(50, 40) is 570
at B(0, 140) is 1120
The cost is minimum at P(50, 40)
This occurs when 50 kg of type & fertilizer and 40
kg of type B fertilizer are mixed to the meet the
requirement.
Part 2
nd

Let x and y represent the number of tables and chairs
respectively that the dealer sells and P be the profit
of the dealer. Then the required LPP is .
Maximize: P = 50x + 15y
Subject to the constraints
500x + 200 y 10,000 5x + 2y 100
x + y = 60 ....(1)
5x + 2y = 100 .... (2)
y
x
O
(1)
(2)
B(0, 60)
A(60, 0)
C (20, 0)
D
(0, 50)

A shaded region OCD is the feasible region.
Now P = 50x + 15y
At O, value of P is O
At C, value of P is 50 20 = 1,000
At D, value of P is 15 50 = 750
Profit is maximum at C (20, 0)

28.
x
x
y

x side of square
y rad. of circle
4x + 2y = 36 ..... (1)
Now area A = x
2
+ y
2

A = x
2
+
2
x 2 18
|
.
|
\
|
[From (1)]

dx
dA
= 2x
4
(18 2x)

2
2
dx
A d
= 2 + 8/ > 0 min
m
area
Form min
m
area
dx
dA
= 0
x =
4
36
+

From (1) , y =
4
18
+

Length of one piece = 4x =
4
144
+

Length of other piece = 2y =
4
36
+

29. Let
x
1
= u ;
y
1
= v;
z
1
= w
Given equation can be written in form

(
(
(
20 9 6
5 6 4
10 3 2

(
(
(
w
v
u
=
(
(
(
2
1
4

A X = B
X = A
1
B
X =
| A |
) A ( Adj
. B, |A| = 1200
X =
1200
2
1
4
.
24 0 72
30 100 110
75 150 75
(
(
(
(
(
(

X =
(
(
(
w
v
u
=
1200
240
400
600
(
(
(
=
(
(
(
5 / 1
3 / 1
2 / 1

u = 1/2 x = 2
v = 1/3 y = 3
w = 1/5 z = 5

At a Glance
Some Important Practical Units
1. Par sec : It is the largest practical unit of
distance.
1 par sec = 3.26 light year
2. X-ray unit : It is the unit of length.
1 X-ray unit = 10
13
m
3. Slug : It is the unit of mass.
1 slug = 14.59 kg
4. Chandra Shekhar limit : It is the largest
practical unit of mass.
1 Chandra Shekhar limit = 1.4 Solar mass
5. Shake : It is the unit of time.
1 Shake = 10
6
second
6. Barn : It is the unit of area.
1 barn = 10
28
m
2

7. Cusec : It is the unit of water flow.
1 cusec = 1 cubic foot per second flow
8. Match No. : This unit is used to express velocity
of supersonic jets.
1 match no. = velocity of sound
= 332 m/sec.
9. Knot : This unit is used to express velocity of
ships in water.
1 knot = 1.852 km/hour
10. Rutherford : It is the unit of radioactivity.
1 rutherford (rd) = 1 10
6
disintegrations/sec
11. Dalton : It is the unit of mass.
1 dalton =
12
1
mass of C
12
= 931 MeV
= 1 a.m.u.
12. Curie : It is the unit of radioactivity.
1 curie = 3.7 10
10
disintegration / sec
XtraEdge Test Series
ANSWER KEY

PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans C A A A A C C D A B
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans B A D B B A B A D

20 A P,R,S B P,R,S C P,Q D P,Q
21 A R,S B P C R D S
Column
Matching
22 A P,Q,R,S B P,R C Q,R D R

CHEMISTRY
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans B A A C B B C A A B
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans C A D B D A C C C

20 A P,S B S C Q D RP
21 A S B P C Q D R
Column
Matching
22 A P,Q B P C P,Q,R D S

MATHEMATICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans B D C B B C A D C D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans C D A A C B B C A

20 A S B Q C P D R
21 A S B R C P D P
Column
Matching
22 A R B S C Q D P

PHYSICS

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans C D A D A B A A D C
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A C B C B C C D B

20 A R B P,S C P,Q D Q
21 A Q B P,R,S C P,R D S
Column
Matching
22 A P,Q B Q C R,S D S

CHEMISTRY

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A D C D A C B A A C
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A C C A A A B C A

20 A Q,R B P,Q,R,S C P,S D P,Q,R
21 A R B S C Q D P
Column
Matching
22 A P,S B P C Q D P,R,S

MATHEMATICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A B B B A B A B D D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans C D D B C A A B D

20 A Q B S C R D P
21 A R B P C S D Q
Column
Matching
22 A R B S C P D Q

IIT- JEE 2012 (February issue)
IIT- JEE 2013 (February issue)

'XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.

"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.

Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of IIT JEE.

Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.

Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills

Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.

Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians

Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/Contests problems and Challenging Questions.

SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
4
th
Floor, CP-Tower,
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005

I wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine XtraEdge for IIT-JEE

Half Yearly Subscription (Rs. 100/-)

One Year subscription (Rs. 200/-)

Two year Subscription (Rs. 400/-)
I am paying R. .through
Money Order (M.O)
Bank Demand Draft of No..Bank..Dated
(Note: Demand Draft should be in favour of "Career Point Infosystems Ltd" payable at Kota.)

Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Father's Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________________________________________
________________________City_____________________________State__________________________
PIN_________________________________________Ph with STD Code __________________________
Class Studying in ________________E-Mail: ________________________________________________
From months: ____________________to ________________________________________________

Subscription Offer for Students
Special
Offer
C
C

IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.

"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.

Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of the IIT JEE.

Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.

Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills

Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.

Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians

Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/ Contests problems and Challenging Questions.

FREE SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
4
th
Floor, CP-Tower,
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005

We wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine XtraEdge for IIT-JEE

Half Yearly Subscription

One Year subscription

Two year Subscription

Institution Detail:
Graduate Collage Senior Secondary School Higher Secondary School

Name of the Institute: _____________________________________________________________________________

Name of the Principal: _____________________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address: _____________________________________________________________________________
__________________City_________________________State__________________________
PIN_____________________Ph with STD Code_____________________________________
Fax_______________________________ E-Mail_____________________________________
Board/ University: _____________________________________________________________________________________

School Seal with Signature
Subscription Offer for Schools
C
C


XtraedgeFebruary 2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XtraedgeFebruary 2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 FEBRUARY 2012

atm = 0.0115 atm

B is varying with time as B

orbital then the ligands

orbital contains the extra electron, then

, and there are four CrF bonds

is a weak field ligand, and so the t

orbital has four lobes whilst

is of higher energy, i.e. less stable. Thus the

orbital. Thus the two ligands

orbitals are unequally occupied, distortion

sec x tan x dx = sec x

cosec x cot x dx = cosec x

sec x dx = log(sec x + tan x) = log tan |

cosec x dx = log (cosec x + cot x) = log tan |

tan x dx = log cos x

cot x dx = log sin x

f{(x)} (x) dx, (x) = t

) )( ( x x dx. Put x = cos

R (sin x, cos x) dx, where R is

R (sin x) cos x dx.

R (cos x) sin x dx.

at the carbonyl group

) y 4 2 ( F = , 0 r = (Q) Motion : Non-periodic

x ( 4 F + = (S) Time period :

and in the plane of

= + 0.80 V. What will be the

+ ) cos sin 2 )( cos 2 (sin x x x x

respectively. Find the

sin (t /2) (i)

and is to the plane given by

ions get displaced from its

get arranged. This results in

+ + 4 / cos 4 / sin 2 4 / sin 4 / cos

+ ) 4 / sin 4 / (cos = 4 sin (x/4) 4 cos (x/4) + c

You might also like